diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'src/lib/libssl/src/doc')
47 files changed, 6293 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/API.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/API.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fe2820259a --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/API.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ | |||
1 | SSL - SSLv2/v3/v23 etc. | ||
2 | |||
3 | BIO - methods and how they plug together | ||
4 | |||
5 | MEM - memory allocation callback | ||
6 | |||
7 | CRYPTO - locking for threads | ||
8 | |||
9 | EVP - Ciphers/Digests/signatures | ||
10 | |||
11 | RSA - methods | ||
12 | |||
13 | X509 - certificate retrieval | ||
14 | |||
15 | X509 - validation | ||
16 | |||
17 | X509 - X509v3 extensions | ||
18 | |||
19 | Objects - adding object identifiers | ||
20 | |||
21 | ASN.1 - parsing | ||
22 | |||
23 | PEM - parsing | ||
24 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/a_verify.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/a_verify.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..06eec17c2b --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/a_verify.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ | |||
1 | From eay@mincom.com Fri Oct 4 18:29:06 1996 | ||
2 | Received: by orb.mincom.oz.au id AA29080 | ||
3 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for eay); Fri, 4 Oct 1996 08:29:07 +1000 | ||
4 | Date: Fri, 4 Oct 1996 08:29:06 +1000 (EST) | ||
5 | From: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au> | ||
6 | X-Sender: eay@orb | ||
7 | To: wplatzer <wplatzer@iaik.tu-graz.ac.at> | ||
8 | Cc: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au>, SSL Mailing List <ssl-users@mincom.com> | ||
9 | Subject: Re: Netscape's Public Key | ||
10 | In-Reply-To: <19961003134837.NTM0049@iaik.tu-graz.ac.at> | ||
11 | Message-Id: <Pine.SOL.3.91.961004081346.8018K-100000@orb> | ||
12 | Mime-Version: 1.0 | ||
13 | Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=US-ASCII | ||
14 | Status: RO | ||
15 | X-Status: | ||
16 | |||
17 | On Thu, 3 Oct 1996, wplatzer wrote: | ||
18 | > I get Public Key from Netscape (Gold 3.0b4), but cannot do anything | ||
19 | > with it... It looks like (asn1parse): | ||
20 | > | ||
21 | > 0:d=0 hl=3 l=180 cons: SEQUENCE | ||
22 | > 3:d=1 hl=2 l= 96 cons: SEQUENCE | ||
23 | > 5:d=2 hl=2 l= 92 cons: SEQUENCE | ||
24 | > 7:d=3 hl=2 l= 13 cons: SEQUENCE | ||
25 | > 9:d=4 hl=2 l= 9 prim: OBJECT :rsaEncryption | ||
26 | > 20:d=4 hl=2 l= 0 prim: NULL | ||
27 | > 22:d=3 hl=2 l= 75 prim: BIT STRING | ||
28 | > 99:d=2 hl=2 l= 0 prim: IA5STRING : | ||
29 | > 101:d=1 hl=2 l= 13 cons: SEQUENCE | ||
30 | > 103:d=2 hl=2 l= 9 prim: OBJECT :md5withRSAEncryption | ||
31 | > 114:d=2 hl=2 l= 0 prim: NULL | ||
32 | > 116:d=1 hl=2 l= 65 prim: BIT STRING | ||
33 | > | ||
34 | > The first BIT STRING is the public key and the second BIT STRING is | ||
35 | > the signature. | ||
36 | > But a public key consists of the public exponent and the modulus. Are | ||
37 | > both numbers in the first BIT STRING? | ||
38 | > Is there a document simply describing this coding stuff (checking | ||
39 | > signature, get the public key, etc.)? | ||
40 | |||
41 | Minimal in SSLeay. If you want to see what the modulus and exponent are, | ||
42 | try asn1parse -offset 25 -length 75 <key.pem | ||
43 | asn1parse will currently stuff up on the 'length 75' part (fixed in next | ||
44 | release) but it will print the stuff. If you are after more | ||
45 | documentation on ASN.1, have a look at www.rsa.com and get their PKCS | ||
46 | documents, most of my initial work on SSLeay was done using them. | ||
47 | |||
48 | As for SSLeay, | ||
49 | util/crypto.num and util/ssl.num are lists of all exported functions in | ||
50 | the library (but not macros :-(. | ||
51 | |||
52 | The ones for extracting public keys from certificates and certificate | ||
53 | requests are EVP_PKEY * X509_REQ_extract_key(X509_REQ *req); | ||
54 | EVP_PKEY * X509_extract_key(X509 *x509); | ||
55 | |||
56 | To verify a signature on a signed ASN.1 object | ||
57 | int X509_verify(X509 *a,EVP_PKEY *key); | ||
58 | int X509_REQ_verify(X509_REQ *a,EVP_PKEY *key); | ||
59 | int X509_CRL_verify(X509_CRL *a,EVP_PKEY *key); | ||
60 | int NETSCAPE_SPKI_verify(NETSCAPE_SPKI *a,EVP_PKEY *key); | ||
61 | |||
62 | I should mention that EVP_PKEY can be used to hold a public or a private key, | ||
63 | since for things like RSA and DSS, a public key is just a subset of what | ||
64 | is stored for the private key. | ||
65 | |||
66 | To sign any of the above structures | ||
67 | |||
68 | int X509_sign(X509 *a,EVP_PKEY *key,EVP_MD *md); | ||
69 | int X509_REQ_sign(X509_REQ *a,EVP_PKEY *key,EVP_MD *md); | ||
70 | int X509_CRL_sign(X509_CRL *a,EVP_PKEY *key,EVP_MD *md); | ||
71 | int NETSCAPE_SPKI_sign(NETSCAPE_SPKI *a,EVP_PKEY *key,EVP_MD *md); | ||
72 | |||
73 | where md is the message digest to sign with. | ||
74 | |||
75 | There are all defined in x509.h and all the _sign and _verify functions are | ||
76 | actually macros to the ASN1_sign() and ASN1_verify() functions. | ||
77 | These functions will put the correct algorithm identifiers in the correct | ||
78 | places in the structures. | ||
79 | |||
80 | eric | ||
81 | -- | ||
82 | Eric Young | BOOL is tri-state according to Bill Gates. | ||
83 | AARNet: eay@mincom.oz.au | RTFM Win32 GetMessage(). | ||
84 | |||
85 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/apps.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/apps.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2a4e0de72 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/apps.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ | |||
1 | The applications | ||
2 | |||
3 | Ok, where to begin.... | ||
4 | In the begining, when SSLeay was small (April 1995), there | ||
5 | were but few applications, they did happily cohabit in | ||
6 | the one bin directory. Then over time, they did multiply and grow, | ||
7 | and they started to look like microsoft software; 500k to print 'hello world'. | ||
8 | A new approach was needed. They were coalessed into one 'Monolithic' | ||
9 | application, ssleay. This one program is composed of many programs that | ||
10 | can all be compiled independantly. | ||
11 | |||
12 | ssleay has 3 modes of operation. | ||
13 | 1) If the ssleay binaray has the name of one of its component programs, it | ||
14 | executes that program and then exits. This can be achieve by using hard or | ||
15 | symbolic links, or failing that, just renaming the binary. | ||
16 | 2) If the first argument to ssleay is the name of one of the component | ||
17 | programs, that program runs that program and then exits. | ||
18 | 3) If there are no arguments, ssleay enters a 'command' mode. Each line is | ||
19 | interpreted as a program name plus arguments. After each 'program' is run, | ||
20 | ssleay returns to the comand line. | ||
21 | |||
22 | dgst - message digests | ||
23 | enc - encryption and base64 encoding | ||
24 | |||
25 | ans1parse - 'pulls' appart ASN.1 encoded objects like certificates. | ||
26 | |||
27 | dh - Diffle-Hellman parameter manipulation. | ||
28 | rsa - RSA manipulations. | ||
29 | crl - Certificate revokion list manipulations | ||
30 | x509 - X509 cert fiddles, including signing. | ||
31 | pkcs7 - pkcs7 manipulation, only DER versions right now. | ||
32 | |||
33 | genrsa - generate an RSA private key. | ||
34 | gendh - Generate a set of Diffle-Hellman parameters. | ||
35 | req - Generate a PKCS#10 object, a certificate request. | ||
36 | |||
37 | s_client - SSL client program | ||
38 | s_server - SSL server program | ||
39 | s_time - A SSL protocol timing program | ||
40 | s_mult - Another SSL server, but it multiplexes | ||
41 | connections. | ||
42 | s_filter - under development | ||
43 | |||
44 | errstr - Convert SSLeay error numbers to strings. | ||
45 | ca - Sign certificate requests, and generate | ||
46 | certificate revokion lists | ||
47 | crl2pkcs7 - put a crl and certifcates into a pkcs7 object. | ||
48 | speed - Benchmark the ciphers. | ||
49 | verify - Check certificates | ||
50 | hashdir - under development | ||
51 | |||
52 | [ there a now a few more options, play with the program to see what they | ||
53 | are ] | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/asn1.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/asn1.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fdad17c05c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/asn1.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ | |||
1 | The ASN.1 Routines. | ||
2 | |||
3 | ASN.1 is a specification for how to encode structured 'data' in binary form. | ||
4 | The approach I have take to the manipulation of structures and their encoding | ||
5 | into ASN.1 is as follows. | ||
6 | |||
7 | For each distinct structure there are 4 function of the following form | ||
8 | TYPE *TYPE_new(void); | ||
9 | void TYPE_free(TYPE *); | ||
10 | TYPE *d2i_TYPE(TYPE **a,unsigned char **pp,long length); | ||
11 | long i2d_TYPE(TYPE *a,unsigned char **pp); /* CHECK RETURN VALUE */ | ||
12 | |||
13 | where TYPE is the type of the 'object'. The TYPE that have these functions | ||
14 | can be in one of 2 forms, either the internal C malloc()ed data structure | ||
15 | or in the DER (a variant of ASN.1 encoding) binary encoding which is just | ||
16 | an array of unsigned bytes. The 'i2d' functions converts from the internal | ||
17 | form to the DER form and the 'd2i' functions convert from the DER form to | ||
18 | the internal form. | ||
19 | |||
20 | The 'new' function returns a malloc()ed version of the structure with all | ||
21 | substructures either created or left as NULL pointers. For 'optional' | ||
22 | fields, they are normally left as NULL to indicate no value. For variable | ||
23 | size sub structures (often 'SET OF' or 'SEQUENCE OF' in ASN.1 syntax) the | ||
24 | STACK data type is used to hold the values. Have a read of stack.doc | ||
25 | and have a look at the relevant header files to see what I mean. If there | ||
26 | is an error while malloc()ing the structure, NULL is returned. | ||
27 | |||
28 | The 'free' function will free() all the sub components of a particular | ||
29 | structure. If any of those sub components have been 'removed', replace | ||
30 | them with NULL pointers, the 'free' functions are tolerant of NULL fields. | ||
31 | |||
32 | The 'd2i' function copies a binary representation into a C structure. It | ||
33 | operates as follows. 'a' is a pointer to a pointer to | ||
34 | the structure to populate, 'pp' is a pointer to a pointer to where the DER | ||
35 | byte string is located and 'length' is the length of the '*pp' data. | ||
36 | If there are no errors, a pointer to the populated structure is returned. | ||
37 | If there is an error, NULL is returned. Errors can occur because of | ||
38 | malloc() failures but normally they will be due to syntax errors in the DER | ||
39 | encoded data being parsed. It is also an error if there was an | ||
40 | attempt to read more that 'length' bytes from '*p'. If | ||
41 | everything works correctly, the value in '*p' is updated | ||
42 | to point at the location just beyond where the DER | ||
43 | structure was read from. In this way, chained calls to 'd2i' type | ||
44 | functions can be made, with the pointer into the 'data' array being | ||
45 | 'walked' along the input byte array. | ||
46 | Depending on the value passed for 'a', different things will be done. If | ||
47 | 'a' is NULL, a new structure will be malloc()ed and returned. If '*a' is | ||
48 | NULL, a new structure will be malloc()ed and put into '*a' and returned. | ||
49 | If '*a' is not NULL, the structure in '*a' will be populated, or in the | ||
50 | case of an error, free()ed and then returned. | ||
51 | Having these semantics means that a structure | ||
52 | can call a 'd2i' function to populate a field and if the field is currently | ||
53 | NULL, the structure will be created. | ||
54 | |||
55 | The 'i2d' function type is used to copy a C structure to a byte array. | ||
56 | The parameter 'a' is the structure to convert and '*p' is where to put it. | ||
57 | As for the 'd2i' type structure, 'p' is updated to point after the last | ||
58 | byte written. If p is NULL, no data is written. The function also returns | ||
59 | the number of bytes written. Where this becomes useful is that if the | ||
60 | function is called with a NULL 'p' value, the length is returned. This can | ||
61 | then be used to malloc() an array of bytes and then the same function can | ||
62 | be recalled passing the malloced array to be written to. e.g. | ||
63 | |||
64 | int len; | ||
65 | unsigned char *bytes,*p; | ||
66 | len=i2d_X509(x,NULL); /* get the size of the ASN1 encoding of 'x' */ | ||
67 | if ((bytes=(unsigned char *)malloc(len)) == NULL) | ||
68 | goto err; | ||
69 | p=bytes; | ||
70 | i2d_X509(x,&p); | ||
71 | |||
72 | Please note that a new variable, 'p' was passed to i2d_X509. After the | ||
73 | call to i2d_X509 p has been incremented by len bytes. | ||
74 | |||
75 | Now the reason for this functional organisation is that it allows nested | ||
76 | structures to be built up by calling these functions as required. There | ||
77 | are various macros used to help write the general 'i2d', 'd2i', 'new' and | ||
78 | 'free' functions. They are discussed in another file and would only be | ||
79 | used by some-one wanting to add new structures to the library. As you | ||
80 | might be able to guess, the process of writing ASN.1 files can be a bit CPU | ||
81 | expensive for complex structures. I'm willing to live with this since the | ||
82 | simpler library code make my life easier and hopefully most programs using | ||
83 | these routines will have their execution profiles dominated by cipher or | ||
84 | message digest routines. | ||
85 | What follows is a list of 'TYPE' values and the corresponding ASN.1 | ||
86 | structure and where it is used. | ||
87 | |||
88 | TYPE ASN.1 | ||
89 | ASN1_INTEGER INTEGER | ||
90 | ASN1_BIT_STRING BIT STRING | ||
91 | ASN1_OCTET_STRING OCTET STRING | ||
92 | ASN1_OBJECT OBJECT IDENTIFIER | ||
93 | ASN1_PRINTABLESTRING PrintableString | ||
94 | ASN1_T61STRING T61String | ||
95 | ASN1_IA5STRING IA5String | ||
96 | ASN1_UTCTIME UTCTime | ||
97 | ASN1_TYPE Any of the above mentioned types plus SEQUENCE and SET | ||
98 | |||
99 | Most of the above mentioned types are actualled stored in the | ||
100 | ASN1_BIT_STRING type and macros are used to differentiate between them. | ||
101 | The 3 types used are | ||
102 | |||
103 | typedef struct asn1_object_st | ||
104 | { | ||
105 | /* both null if a dynamic ASN1_OBJECT, one is | ||
106 | * defined if a 'static' ASN1_OBJECT */ | ||
107 | char *sn,*ln; | ||
108 | int nid; | ||
109 | int length; | ||
110 | unsigned char *data; | ||
111 | } ASN1_OBJECT; | ||
112 | This is used to store ASN1 OBJECTS. Read 'objects.doc' for details ono | ||
113 | routines to manipulate this structure. 'sn' and 'ln' are used to hold text | ||
114 | strings that represent the object (short name and long or lower case name). | ||
115 | These are used by the 'OBJ' library. 'nid' is a number used by the OBJ | ||
116 | library to uniquely identify objects. The ASN1 routines will populate the | ||
117 | 'length' and 'data' fields which will contain the bit string representing | ||
118 | the object. | ||
119 | |||
120 | typedef struct asn1_bit_string_st | ||
121 | { | ||
122 | int length; | ||
123 | int type; | ||
124 | unsigned char *data; | ||
125 | } ASN1_BIT_STRING; | ||
126 | This structure is used to hold all the other base ASN1 types except for | ||
127 | ASN1_UTCTIME (which is really just a 'char *'). Length is the number of | ||
128 | bytes held in data and type is the ASN1 type of the object (there is a list | ||
129 | in asn1.h). | ||
130 | |||
131 | typedef struct asn1_type_st | ||
132 | { | ||
133 | int type; | ||
134 | union { | ||
135 | char *ptr; | ||
136 | ASN1_INTEGER * integer; | ||
137 | ASN1_BIT_STRING * bit_string; | ||
138 | ASN1_OCTET_STRING * octet_string; | ||
139 | ASN1_OBJECT * object; | ||
140 | ASN1_PRINTABLESTRING * printablestring; | ||
141 | ASN1_T61STRING * t61string; | ||
142 | ASN1_IA5STRING * ia5string; | ||
143 | ASN1_UTCTIME * utctime; | ||
144 | ASN1_BIT_STRING * set; | ||
145 | ASN1_BIT_STRING * sequence; | ||
146 | } value; | ||
147 | } ASN1_TYPE; | ||
148 | This structure is used in a few places when 'any' type of object can be | ||
149 | expected. | ||
150 | |||
151 | X509 Certificate | ||
152 | X509_CINF CertificateInfo | ||
153 | X509_ALGOR AlgorithmIdentifier | ||
154 | X509_NAME Name | ||
155 | X509_NAME_ENTRY A single sub component of the name. | ||
156 | X509_VAL Validity | ||
157 | X509_PUBKEY SubjectPublicKeyInfo | ||
158 | The above mentioned types are declared in x509.h. They are all quite | ||
159 | straight forward except for the X509_NAME/X509_NAME_ENTRY pair. | ||
160 | A X509_NAME is a STACK (see stack.doc) of X509_NAME_ENTRY's. | ||
161 | typedef struct X509_name_entry_st | ||
162 | { | ||
163 | ASN1_OBJECT *object; | ||
164 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *value; | ||
165 | int set; | ||
166 | int size; /* temp variable */ | ||
167 | } X509_NAME_ENTRY; | ||
168 | The size is a temporary variable used by i2d_NAME and set is the set number | ||
169 | for the particular NAME_ENTRY. A X509_NAME is encoded as a sequence of | ||
170 | sequence of sets. Normally each set contains only a single item. | ||
171 | Sometimes it contains more. Normally throughout this library there will be | ||
172 | only one item per set. The set field contains the 'set' that this entry is | ||
173 | a member of. So if you have just created a X509_NAME structure and | ||
174 | populated it with X509_NAME_ENTRYs, you should then traverse the X509_NAME | ||
175 | (which is just a STACK) and set the 'set/' field to incrementing numbers. | ||
176 | For more details on why this is done, read the ASN.1 spec for Distinguished | ||
177 | Names. | ||
178 | |||
179 | X509_REQ CertificateRequest | ||
180 | X509_REQ_INFO CertificateRequestInfo | ||
181 | These are used to hold certificate requests. | ||
182 | |||
183 | X509_CRL CertificateRevocationList | ||
184 | These are used to hold a certificate revocation list | ||
185 | |||
186 | RSAPrivateKey PrivateKeyInfo | ||
187 | RSAPublicKey PublicKeyInfo | ||
188 | Both these 'function groups' operate on 'RSA' structures (see rsa.doc). | ||
189 | The difference is that the RSAPublicKey operations only manipulate the m | ||
190 | and e fields in the RSA structure. | ||
191 | |||
192 | DSAPrivateKey DSS private key | ||
193 | DSAPublicKey DSS public key | ||
194 | Both these 'function groups' operate on 'DSS' structures (see dsa.doc). | ||
195 | The difference is that the RSAPublicKey operations only manipulate the | ||
196 | XXX fields in the DSA structure. | ||
197 | |||
198 | DHparams DHParameter | ||
199 | This is used to hold the p and g value for The Diffie-Hellman operation. | ||
200 | The function deal with the 'DH' strucure (see dh.doc). | ||
201 | |||
202 | Now all of these function types can be used with several other functions to give | ||
203 | quite useful set of general manipulation routines. Normally one would | ||
204 | not uses these functions directly but use them via macros. | ||
205 | |||
206 | char *ASN1_dup(int (*i2d)(),char *(*d2i)(),char *x); | ||
207 | 'x' is the input structure case to a 'char *', 'i2d' is the 'i2d_TYPE' | ||
208 | function for the type that 'x' is and d2i is the 'd2i_TYPE' function for the | ||
209 | type that 'x' is. As is obvious from the parameters, this function | ||
210 | duplicates the strucutre by transforming it into the DER form and then | ||
211 | re-loading it into a new strucutre and returning the new strucutre. This | ||
212 | is obviously a bit cpu intensive but when faced with a complex dynamic | ||
213 | structure this is the simplest programming approach. There are macros for | ||
214 | duplicating the major data types but is simple to add extras. | ||
215 | |||
216 | char *ASN1_d2i_fp(char *(*new)(),char *(*d2i)(),FILE *fp,unsigned char **x); | ||
217 | 'x' is a pointer to a pointer of the 'desired type'. new and d2i are the | ||
218 | corresponding 'TYPE_new' and 'd2i_TYPE' functions for the type and 'fp' is | ||
219 | an open file pointer to read from. This function reads from 'fp' as much | ||
220 | data as it can and then uses 'd2i' to parse the bytes to load and return | ||
221 | the parsed strucutre in 'x' (if it was non-NULL) and to actually return the | ||
222 | strucutre. The behavior of 'x' is as per all the other d2i functions. | ||
223 | |||
224 | char *ASN1_d2i_bio(char *(*new)(),char *(*d2i)(),BIO *fp,unsigned char **x); | ||
225 | The 'BIO' is the new IO type being used in SSLeay (see bio.doc). This | ||
226 | function is the same as ASN1_d2i_fp() except for the BIO argument. | ||
227 | ASN1_d2i_fp() actually calls this function. | ||
228 | |||
229 | int ASN1_i2d_fp(int (*i2d)(),FILE *out,unsigned char *x); | ||
230 | 'x' is converted to bytes by 'i2d' and then written to 'out'. ASN1_i2d_fp | ||
231 | and ASN1_d2i_fp are not really symetric since ASN1_i2d_fp will read all | ||
232 | available data from the file pointer before parsing a single item while | ||
233 | ASN1_i2d_fp can be used to write a sequence of data objects. To read a | ||
234 | series of objects from a file I would sugest loading the file into a buffer | ||
235 | and calling the relevent 'd2i' functions. | ||
236 | |||
237 | char *ASN1_d2i_bio(char *(*new)(),char *(*d2i)(),BIO *fp,unsigned char **x); | ||
238 | This function is the same as ASN1_i2d_fp() except for the BIO argument. | ||
239 | ASN1_i2d_fp() actually calls this function. | ||
240 | |||
241 | char * PEM_ASN1_read(char *(*d2i)(),char *name,FILE *fp,char **x,int (*cb)()); | ||
242 | This function will read the next PEM encoded (base64) object of the same | ||
243 | type as 'x' (loaded by the d2i function). 'name' is the name that is in | ||
244 | the '-----BEGIN name-----' that designates the start of that object type. | ||
245 | If the data is encrypted, 'cb' will be called to prompt for a password. If | ||
246 | it is NULL a default function will be used to prompt from the password. | ||
247 | 'x' is delt with as per the standard 'd2i' function interface. This | ||
248 | function can be used to read a series of objects from a file. While any | ||
249 | data type can be encrypted (see PEM_ASN1_write) only RSA private keys tend | ||
250 | to be encrypted. | ||
251 | |||
252 | char * PEM_ASN1_read_bio(char *(*d2i)(),char *name,BIO *fp, | ||
253 | char **x,int (*cb)()); | ||
254 | Same as PEM_ASN1_read() except using a BIO. This is called by | ||
255 | PEM_ASN1_read(). | ||
256 | |||
257 | int PEM_ASN1_write(int (*i2d)(),char *name,FILE *fp,char *x,EVP_CIPHER *enc, | ||
258 | unsigned char *kstr,int klen,int (*callback)()); | ||
259 | |||
260 | int PEM_ASN1_write_bio(int (*i2d)(),char *name,BIO *fp, | ||
261 | char *x,EVP_CIPHER *enc,unsigned char *kstr,int klen, | ||
262 | int (*callback)()); | ||
263 | |||
264 | int ASN1_sign(int (*i2d)(), X509_ALGOR *algor1, X509_ALGOR *algor2, | ||
265 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *signature, char *data, RSA *rsa, EVP_MD *type); | ||
266 | int ASN1_verify(int (*i2d)(), X509_ALGOR *algor1, | ||
267 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *signature,char *data, RSA *rsa); | ||
268 | |||
269 | int ASN1_BIT_STRING_cmp(ASN1_BIT_STRING *a, ASN1_BIT_STRING *b); | ||
270 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *ASN1_BIT_STRING_type_new(int type ); | ||
271 | |||
272 | int ASN1_UTCTIME_check(ASN1_UTCTIME *a); | ||
273 | void ASN1_UTCTIME_print(BIO *fp,ASN1_UTCTIME *a); | ||
274 | ASN1_UTCTIME *ASN1_UTCTIME_dup(ASN1_UTCTIME *a); | ||
275 | |||
276 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *d2i_asn1_print_type(ASN1_BIT_STRING **a,unsigned char **pp, | ||
277 | long length,int type); | ||
278 | |||
279 | int i2d_ASN1_SET(STACK *a, unsigned char **pp, | ||
280 | int (*func)(), int ex_tag, int ex_class); | ||
281 | STACK * d2i_ASN1_SET(STACK **a, unsigned char **pp, long length, | ||
282 | char *(*func)(), int ex_tag, int ex_class); | ||
283 | |||
284 | int i2a_ASN1_OBJECT(BIO *bp,ASN1_OBJECT *object); | ||
285 | int i2a_ASN1_INTEGER(BIO *bp, ASN1_INTEGER *a); | ||
286 | int a2i_ASN1_INTEGER(BIO *bp,ASN1_INTEGER *bs,char *buf,int size); | ||
287 | |||
288 | int ASN1_INTEGER_set(ASN1_INTEGER *a, long v); | ||
289 | long ASN1_INTEGER_get(ASN1_INTEGER *a); | ||
290 | ASN1_INTEGER *BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER(BIGNUM *bn, ASN1_INTEGER *ai); | ||
291 | BIGNUM *ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN(ASN1_INTEGER *ai,BIGNUM *bn); | ||
292 | |||
293 | /* given a string, return the correct type. Max is the maximum number | ||
294 | * of bytes to parse. It stops parsing when 'max' bytes have been | ||
295 | * processed or a '\0' is hit */ | ||
296 | int ASN1_PRINTABLE_type(unsigned char *s,int max); | ||
297 | |||
298 | void ASN1_parse(BIO *fp,unsigned char *pp,long len); | ||
299 | |||
300 | int i2d_ASN1_bytes(ASN1_BIT_STRING *a, unsigned char **pp, int tag, int class); | ||
301 | ASN1_BIT_STRING *d2i_ASN1_bytes(ASN1_OCTET_STRING **a, unsigned char **pp, | ||
302 | long length, int Ptag, int Pclass); | ||
303 | |||
304 | /* PARSING */ | ||
305 | int asn1_Finish(ASN1_CTX *c); | ||
306 | |||
307 | /* SPECIALS */ | ||
308 | int ASN1_get_object(unsigned char **pp, long *plength, int *ptag, | ||
309 | int *pclass, long omax); | ||
310 | int ASN1_check_infinite_end(unsigned char **p,long len); | ||
311 | void ASN1_put_object(unsigned char **pp, int constructed, int length, | ||
312 | int tag, int class); | ||
313 | int ASN1_object_size(int constructed, int length, int tag); | ||
314 | |||
315 | X509 * X509_get_cert(CERTIFICATE_CTX *ctx,X509_NAME * name,X509 *tmp_x509); | ||
316 | int X509_add_cert(CERTIFICATE_CTX *ctx,X509 *); | ||
317 | |||
318 | char * X509_cert_verify_error_string(int n); | ||
319 | int X509_add_cert_file(CERTIFICATE_CTX *c,char *file, int type); | ||
320 | char * X509_gmtime (char *s, long adj); | ||
321 | int X509_add_cert_dir (CERTIFICATE_CTX *c,char *dir, int type); | ||
322 | int X509_load_verify_locations (CERTIFICATE_CTX *ctx, | ||
323 | char *file_env, char *dir_env); | ||
324 | int X509_set_default_verify_paths(CERTIFICATE_CTX *cts); | ||
325 | X509 * X509_new_D2i_X509(int len, unsigned char *p); | ||
326 | char * X509_get_default_cert_area(void ); | ||
327 | char * X509_get_default_cert_dir(void ); | ||
328 | char * X509_get_default_cert_file(void ); | ||
329 | char * X509_get_default_cert_dir_env(void ); | ||
330 | char * X509_get_default_cert_file_env(void ); | ||
331 | char * X509_get_default_private_dir(void ); | ||
332 | X509_REQ *X509_X509_TO_req(X509 *x, RSA *rsa); | ||
333 | int X509_cert_verify(CERTIFICATE_CTX *ctx,X509 *xs, int (*cb)()); | ||
334 | |||
335 | CERTIFICATE_CTX *CERTIFICATE_CTX_new(); | ||
336 | void CERTIFICATE_CTX_free(CERTIFICATE_CTX *c); | ||
337 | |||
338 | void X509_NAME_print(BIO *fp, X509_NAME *name, int obase); | ||
339 | int X509_print_fp(FILE *fp,X509 *x); | ||
340 | int X509_print(BIO *fp,X509 *x); | ||
341 | |||
342 | X509_INFO * X509_INFO_new(void); | ||
343 | void X509_INFO_free(X509_INFO *a); | ||
344 | |||
345 | char * X509_NAME_oneline(X509_NAME *a); | ||
346 | |||
347 | #define X509_verify(x,rsa) | ||
348 | #define X509_REQ_verify(x,rsa) | ||
349 | #define X509_CRL_verify(x,rsa) | ||
350 | |||
351 | #define X509_sign(x,rsa,md) | ||
352 | #define X509_REQ_sign(x,rsa,md) | ||
353 | #define X509_CRL_sign(x,rsa,md) | ||
354 | |||
355 | #define X509_dup(x509) | ||
356 | #define d2i_X509_fp(fp,x509) | ||
357 | #define i2d_X509_fp(fp,x509) | ||
358 | #define d2i_X509_bio(bp,x509) | ||
359 | #define i2d_X509_bio(bp,x509) | ||
360 | |||
361 | #define X509_CRL_dup(crl) | ||
362 | #define d2i_X509_CRL_fp(fp,crl) | ||
363 | #define i2d_X509_CRL_fp(fp,crl) | ||
364 | #define d2i_X509_CRL_bio(bp,crl) | ||
365 | #define i2d_X509_CRL_bio(bp,crl) | ||
366 | |||
367 | #define X509_REQ_dup(req) | ||
368 | #define d2i_X509_REQ_fp(fp,req) | ||
369 | #define i2d_X509_REQ_fp(fp,req) | ||
370 | #define d2i_X509_REQ_bio(bp,req) | ||
371 | #define i2d_X509_REQ_bio(bp,req) | ||
372 | |||
373 | #define RSAPrivateKey_dup(rsa) | ||
374 | #define d2i_RSAPrivateKey_fp(fp,rsa) | ||
375 | #define i2d_RSAPrivateKey_fp(fp,rsa) | ||
376 | #define d2i_RSAPrivateKey_bio(bp,rsa) | ||
377 | #define i2d_RSAPrivateKey_bio(bp,rsa) | ||
378 | |||
379 | #define X509_NAME_dup(xn) | ||
380 | #define X509_NAME_ENTRY_dup(ne) | ||
381 | |||
382 | void X509_REQ_print_fp(FILE *fp,X509_REQ *req); | ||
383 | void X509_REQ_print(BIO *fp,X509_REQ *req); | ||
384 | |||
385 | RSA *X509_REQ_extract_key(X509_REQ *req); | ||
386 | RSA *X509_extract_key(X509 *x509); | ||
387 | |||
388 | int X509_issuer_and_serial_cmp(X509 *a, X509 *b); | ||
389 | unsigned long X509_issuer_and_serial_hash(X509 *a); | ||
390 | |||
391 | X509_NAME * X509_get_issuer_name(X509 *a); | ||
392 | int X509_issuer_name_cmp(X509 *a, X509 *b); | ||
393 | unsigned long X509_issuer_name_hash(X509 *a); | ||
394 | |||
395 | X509_NAME * X509_get_subject_name(X509 *a); | ||
396 | int X509_subject_name_cmp(X509 *a,X509 *b); | ||
397 | unsigned long X509_subject_name_hash(X509 *x); | ||
398 | |||
399 | int X509_NAME_cmp (X509_NAME *a, X509_NAME *b); | ||
400 | unsigned long X509_NAME_hash(X509_NAME *x); | ||
401 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bio.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bio.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..545a57cdff --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bio.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,423 @@ | |||
1 | BIO Routines | ||
2 | |||
3 | This documentation is rather sparse, you are probably best | ||
4 | off looking at the code for specific details. | ||
5 | |||
6 | The BIO library is a IO abstraction that was originally | ||
7 | inspired by the need to have callbacks to perform IO to FILE | ||
8 | pointers when using Windows 3.1 DLLs. There are two types | ||
9 | of BIO; a source/sink type and a filter type. | ||
10 | The source/sink methods are as follows: | ||
11 | - BIO_s_mem() memory buffer - a read/write byte array that | ||
12 | grows until memory runs out :-). | ||
13 | - BIO_s_file() FILE pointer - A wrapper around the normal | ||
14 | 'FILE *' commands, good for use with stdin/stdout. | ||
15 | - BIO_s_fd() File descriptor - A wrapper around file | ||
16 | descriptors, often used with pipes. | ||
17 | - BIO_s_socket() Socket - Used around sockets. It is | ||
18 | mostly in the Microsoft world that sockets are different | ||
19 | from file descriptors and there are all those ugly winsock | ||
20 | commands. | ||
21 | - BIO_s_null() Null - read nothing and write nothing.; a | ||
22 | useful endpoint for filter type BIO's specifically things | ||
23 | like the message digest BIO. | ||
24 | |||
25 | The filter types are | ||
26 | - BIO_f_buffer() IO buffering - does output buffering into | ||
27 | larger chunks and performs input buffering to allow gets() | ||
28 | type functions. | ||
29 | - BIO_f_md() Message digest - a transparent filter that can | ||
30 | be asked to return a message digest for the data that has | ||
31 | passed through it. | ||
32 | - BIO_f_cipher() Encrypt or decrypt all data passing | ||
33 | through the filter. | ||
34 | - BIO_f_base64() Base64 decode on read and encode on write. | ||
35 | - BIO_f_ssl() A filter that performs SSL encryption on the | ||
36 | data sent through it. | ||
37 | |||
38 | Base BIO functions. | ||
39 | The BIO library has a set of base functions that are | ||
40 | implemented for each particular type. Filter BIOs will | ||
41 | normally call the equivalent function on the source/sink BIO | ||
42 | that they are layered on top of after they have performed | ||
43 | some modification to the data stream. Multiple filter BIOs | ||
44 | can be 'push' into a stack of modifers, so to read from a | ||
45 | file, unbase64 it, then decrypt it, a BIO_f_cipher, | ||
46 | BIO_f_base64 and a BIO_s_file would probably be used. If a | ||
47 | sha-1 and md5 message digest needed to be generated, a stack | ||
48 | two BIO_f_md() BIOs and a BIO_s_null() BIO could be used. | ||
49 | The base functions are | ||
50 | - BIO *BIO_new(BIO_METHOD *type); Create a new BIO of type 'type'. | ||
51 | - int BIO_free(BIO *a); Free a BIO structure. Depending on | ||
52 | the configuration, this will free the underlying data | ||
53 | object for a source/sink BIO. | ||
54 | - int BIO_read(BIO *b, char *data, int len); Read upto 'len' | ||
55 | bytes into 'data'. | ||
56 | - int BIO_gets(BIO *bp,char *buf, int size); Depending on | ||
57 | the BIO, this can either be a 'get special' or a get one | ||
58 | line of data, as per fgets(); | ||
59 | - int BIO_write(BIO *b, char *data, int len); Write 'len' | ||
60 | bytes from 'data' to the 'b' BIO. | ||
61 | - int BIO_puts(BIO *bp,char *buf); Either a 'put special' or | ||
62 | a write null terminated string as per fputs(). | ||
63 | - long BIO_ctrl(BIO *bp,int cmd,long larg,char *parg); A | ||
64 | control function which is used to manipulate the BIO | ||
65 | structure and modify it's state and or report on it. This | ||
66 | function is just about never used directly, rather it | ||
67 | should be used in conjunction with BIO_METHOD specific | ||
68 | macros. | ||
69 | - BIO *BIO_push(BIO *new_top, BIO *old); new_top is apped to the | ||
70 | top of the 'old' BIO list. new_top should be a filter BIO. | ||
71 | All writes will go through 'new_top' first and last on read. | ||
72 | 'old' is returned. | ||
73 | - BIO *BIO_pop(BIO *bio); the new topmost BIO is returned, NULL if | ||
74 | there are no more. | ||
75 | |||
76 | If a particular low level BIO method is not supported | ||
77 | (normally BIO_gets()), -2 will be returned if that method is | ||
78 | called. Otherwise the IO methods (read, write, gets, puts) | ||
79 | will return the number of bytes read or written, and 0 or -1 | ||
80 | for error (or end of input). For the -1 case, | ||
81 | BIO_should_retry(bio) can be called to determine if it was a | ||
82 | genuine error or a temporary problem. -2 will also be | ||
83 | returned if the BIO has not been initalised yet, in all | ||
84 | cases, the correct error codes are set (accessible via the | ||
85 | ERR library). | ||
86 | |||
87 | |||
88 | The following functions are convenience functions: | ||
89 | - int BIO_printf(BIO *bio, char * format, ..); printf but | ||
90 | to a BIO handle. | ||
91 | - long BIO_ctrl_int(BIO *bp,int cmd,long larg,int iarg); a | ||
92 | convenience function to allow a different argument types | ||
93 | to be passed to BIO_ctrl(). | ||
94 | - int BIO_dump(BIO *b,char *bytes,int len); output 'len' | ||
95 | bytes from 'bytes' in a hex dump debug format. | ||
96 | - long BIO_debug_callback(BIO *bio, int cmd, char *argp, int | ||
97 | argi, long argl, long ret) - a default debug BIO callback, | ||
98 | this is mentioned below. To use this one normally has to | ||
99 | use the BIO_set_callback_arg() function to assign an | ||
100 | output BIO for the callback to use. | ||
101 | - BIO *BIO_find_type(BIO *bio,int type); when there is a 'stack' | ||
102 | of BIOs, this function scan the list and returns the first | ||
103 | that is of type 'type', as listed in buffer.h under BIO_TYPE_XXX. | ||
104 | - void BIO_free_all(BIO *bio); Free the bio and all other BIOs | ||
105 | in the list. It walks the bio->next_bio list. | ||
106 | |||
107 | |||
108 | |||
109 | Extra commands are normally implemented as macros calling BIO_ctrl(). | ||
110 | - BIO_number_read(BIO *bio) - the number of bytes processed | ||
111 | by BIO_read(bio,.). | ||
112 | - BIO_number_written(BIO *bio) - the number of bytes written | ||
113 | by BIO_write(bio,.). | ||
114 | - BIO_reset(BIO *bio) - 'reset' the BIO. | ||
115 | - BIO_eof(BIO *bio) - non zero if we are at the current end | ||
116 | of input. | ||
117 | - BIO_set_close(BIO *bio, int close_flag) - set the close flag. | ||
118 | - BIO_get_close(BIO *bio) - return the close flag. | ||
119 | BIO_pending(BIO *bio) - return the number of bytes waiting | ||
120 | to be read (normally buffered internally). | ||
121 | - BIO_flush(BIO *bio) - output any data waiting to be output. | ||
122 | - BIO_should_retry(BIO *io) - after a BIO_read/BIO_write | ||
123 | operation returns 0 or -1, a call to this function will | ||
124 | return non zero if you should retry the call later (this | ||
125 | is for non-blocking IO). | ||
126 | - BIO_should_read(BIO *io) - we should retry when data can | ||
127 | be read. | ||
128 | - BIO_should_write(BIO *io) - we should retry when data can | ||
129 | be written. | ||
130 | - BIO_method_name(BIO *io) - return a string for the method name. | ||
131 | - BIO_method_type(BIO *io) - return the unique ID of the BIO method. | ||
132 | - BIO_set_callback(BIO *io, long (*callback)(BIO *io, int | ||
133 | cmd, char *argp, int argi, long argl, long ret); - sets | ||
134 | the debug callback. | ||
135 | - BIO_get_callback(BIO *io) - return the assigned function | ||
136 | as mentioned above. | ||
137 | - BIO_set_callback_arg(BIO *io, char *arg) - assign some | ||
138 | data against the BIO. This is normally used by the debug | ||
139 | callback but could in reality be used for anything. To | ||
140 | get an idea of how all this works, have a look at the code | ||
141 | in the default debug callback mentioned above. The | ||
142 | callback can modify the return values. | ||
143 | |||
144 | Details of the BIO_METHOD structure. | ||
145 | typedef struct bio_method_st | ||
146 | { | ||
147 | int type; | ||
148 | char *name; | ||
149 | int (*bwrite)(); | ||
150 | int (*bread)(); | ||
151 | int (*bputs)(); | ||
152 | int (*bgets)(); | ||
153 | long (*ctrl)(); | ||
154 | int (*create)(); | ||
155 | int (*destroy)(); | ||
156 | } BIO_METHOD; | ||
157 | |||
158 | The 'type' is the numeric type of the BIO, these are listed in buffer.h; | ||
159 | 'Name' is a textual representation of the BIO 'type'. | ||
160 | The 7 function pointers point to the respective function | ||
161 | methods, some of which can be NULL if not implemented. | ||
162 | The BIO structure | ||
163 | typedef struct bio_st | ||
164 | { | ||
165 | BIO_METHOD *method; | ||
166 | long (*callback)(BIO * bio, int mode, char *argp, int | ||
167 | argi, long argl, long ret); | ||
168 | char *cb_arg; /* first argument for the callback */ | ||
169 | int init; | ||
170 | int shutdown; | ||
171 | int flags; /* extra storage */ | ||
172 | int num; | ||
173 | char *ptr; | ||
174 | struct bio_st *next_bio; /* used by filter BIOs */ | ||
175 | int references; | ||
176 | unsigned long num_read; | ||
177 | unsigned long num_write; | ||
178 | } BIO; | ||
179 | |||
180 | - 'Method' is the BIO method. | ||
181 | - 'callback', when configured, is called before and after | ||
182 | each BIO method is called for that particular BIO. This | ||
183 | is intended primarily for debugging and of informational feedback. | ||
184 | - 'init' is 0 when the BIO can be used for operation. | ||
185 | Often, after a BIO is created, a number of operations may | ||
186 | need to be performed before it is available for use. An | ||
187 | example is for BIO_s_sock(). A socket needs to be | ||
188 | assigned to the BIO before it can be used. | ||
189 | - 'shutdown', this flag indicates if the underlying | ||
190 | comunication primative being used should be closed/freed | ||
191 | when the BIO is closed. | ||
192 | - 'flags' is used to hold extra state. It is primarily used | ||
193 | to hold information about why a non-blocking operation | ||
194 | failed and to record startup protocol information for the | ||
195 | SSL BIO. | ||
196 | - 'num' and 'ptr' are used to hold instance specific state | ||
197 | like file descriptors or local data structures. | ||
198 | - 'next_bio' is used by filter BIOs to hold the pointer of the | ||
199 | next BIO in the chain. written data is sent to this BIO and | ||
200 | data read is taken from it. | ||
201 | - 'references' is used to indicate the number of pointers to | ||
202 | this structure. This needs to be '1' before a call to | ||
203 | BIO_free() is made if the BIO_free() function is to | ||
204 | actually free() the structure, otherwise the reference | ||
205 | count is just decreased. The actual BIO subsystem does | ||
206 | not really use this functionality but it is useful when | ||
207 | used in more advanced applicaion. | ||
208 | - num_read and num_write are the total number of bytes | ||
209 | read/written via the 'read()' and 'write()' methods. | ||
210 | |||
211 | BIO_ctrl operations. | ||
212 | The following is the list of standard commands passed as the | ||
213 | second parameter to BIO_ctrl() and should be supported by | ||
214 | all BIO as best as possible. Some are optional, some are | ||
215 | manditory, in any case, where is makes sense, a filter BIO | ||
216 | should pass such requests to underlying BIO's. | ||
217 | - BIO_CTRL_RESET - Reset the BIO back to an initial state. | ||
218 | - BIO_CTRL_EOF - return 0 if we are not at the end of input, | ||
219 | non 0 if we are. | ||
220 | - BIO_CTRL_INFO - BIO specific special command, normal | ||
221 | information return. | ||
222 | - BIO_CTRL_SET - set IO specific parameter. | ||
223 | - BIO_CTRL_GET - get IO specific parameter. | ||
224 | - BIO_CTRL_GET_CLOSE - Get the close on BIO_free() flag, one | ||
225 | of BIO_CLOSE or BIO_NOCLOSE. | ||
226 | - BIO_CTRL_SET_CLOSE - Set the close on BIO_free() flag. | ||
227 | - BIO_CTRL_PENDING - Return the number of bytes available | ||
228 | for instant reading | ||
229 | - BIO_CTRL_FLUSH - Output pending data, return number of bytes output. | ||
230 | - BIO_CTRL_SHOULD_RETRY - After an IO error (-1 returned) | ||
231 | should we 'retry' when IO is possible on the underlying IO object. | ||
232 | - BIO_CTRL_RETRY_TYPE - What kind of IO are we waiting on. | ||
233 | |||
234 | The following command is a special BIO_s_file() specific option. | ||
235 | - BIO_CTRL_SET_FILENAME - specify a file to open for IO. | ||
236 | |||
237 | The BIO_CTRL_RETRY_TYPE needs a little more explanation. | ||
238 | When performing non-blocking IO, or say reading on a memory | ||
239 | BIO, when no data is present (or cannot be written), | ||
240 | BIO_read() and/or BIO_write() will return -1. | ||
241 | BIO_should_retry(bio) will return true if this is due to an | ||
242 | IO condition rather than an actual error. In the case of | ||
243 | BIO_s_mem(), a read when there is no data will return -1 and | ||
244 | a should retry when there is more 'read' data. | ||
245 | The retry type is deduced from 2 macros | ||
246 | BIO_should_read(bio) and BIO_should_write(bio). | ||
247 | Now while it may appear obvious that a BIO_read() failure | ||
248 | should indicate that a retry should be performed when more | ||
249 | read data is available, this is often not true when using | ||
250 | things like an SSL BIO. During the SSL protocol startup | ||
251 | multiple reads and writes are performed, triggered by any | ||
252 | SSL_read or SSL_write. | ||
253 | So to write code that will transparently handle either a | ||
254 | socket or SSL BIO, | ||
255 | i=BIO_read(bio,..) | ||
256 | if (I == -1) | ||
257 | { | ||
258 | if (BIO_should_retry(bio)) | ||
259 | { | ||
260 | if (BIO_should_read(bio)) | ||
261 | { | ||
262 | /* call us again when BIO can be read */ | ||
263 | } | ||
264 | if (BIO_should_write(bio)) | ||
265 | { | ||
266 | /* call us again when BIO can be written */ | ||
267 | } | ||
268 | } | ||
269 | } | ||
270 | |||
271 | At this point in time only read and write conditions can be | ||
272 | used but in the future I can see the situation for other | ||
273 | conditions, specifically with SSL there could be a condition | ||
274 | of a X509 certificate lookup taking place and so the non- | ||
275 | blocking BIO_read would require a retry when the certificate | ||
276 | lookup subsystem has finished it's lookup. This is all | ||
277 | makes more sense and is easy to use in a event loop type | ||
278 | setup. | ||
279 | When using the SSL BIO, either SSL_read() or SSL_write()s | ||
280 | can be called during the protocol startup and things will | ||
281 | still work correctly. | ||
282 | The nice aspect of the use of the BIO_should_retry() macro | ||
283 | is that all the errno codes that indicate a non-fatal error | ||
284 | are encapsulated in one place. The Windows specific error | ||
285 | codes and WSAGetLastError() calls are also hidden from the | ||
286 | application. | ||
287 | |||
288 | Notes on each BIO method. | ||
289 | Normally buffer.h is just required but depending on the | ||
290 | BIO_METHOD, ssl.h or evp.h will also be required. | ||
291 | |||
292 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_mem(void); | ||
293 | - BIO_set_mem_buf(BIO *bio, BUF_MEM *bm, int close_flag) - | ||
294 | set the underlying BUF_MEM structure for the BIO to use. | ||
295 | - BIO_get_mem_ptr(BIO *bio, char **pp) - if pp is not NULL, | ||
296 | set it to point to the memory array and return the number | ||
297 | of bytes available. | ||
298 | A read/write BIO. Any data written is appended to the | ||
299 | memory array and any read is read from the front. This BIO | ||
300 | can be used for read/write at the same time. BIO_gets() is | ||
301 | supported in the fgets() sense. | ||
302 | BIO_CTRL_INFO can be used to retrieve pointers to the memory | ||
303 | buffer and it's length. | ||
304 | |||
305 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_file(void); | ||
306 | - BIO_set_fp(BIO *bio, FILE *fp, int close_flag) - set 'FILE *' to use. | ||
307 | - BIO_get_fp(BIO *bio, FILE **fp) - get the 'FILE *' in use. | ||
308 | - BIO_read_filename(BIO *bio, char *name) - read from file. | ||
309 | - BIO_write_filename(BIO *bio, char *name) - write to file. | ||
310 | - BIO_append_filename(BIO *bio, char *name) - append to file. | ||
311 | This BIO sits over the normal system fread()/fgets() type | ||
312 | functions. Gets() is supported. This BIO in theory could be | ||
313 | used for read and write but it is best to think of each BIO | ||
314 | of this type as either a read or a write BIO, not both. | ||
315 | |||
316 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_socket(void); | ||
317 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_fd(void); | ||
318 | - BIO_sock_should_retry(int i) - the underlying function | ||
319 | used to determine if a call should be retried; the | ||
320 | argument is the '0' or '-1' returned by the previous BIO | ||
321 | operation. | ||
322 | - BIO_fd_should_retry(int i) - same as the | ||
323 | - BIO_sock_should_retry() except that it is different internally. | ||
324 | - BIO_set_fd(BIO *bio, int fd, int close_flag) - set the | ||
325 | file descriptor to use | ||
326 | - BIO_get_fd(BIO *bio, int *fd) - get the file descriptor. | ||
327 | These two methods are very similar. Gets() is not | ||
328 | supported, if you want this functionality, put a | ||
329 | BIO_f_buffer() onto it. This BIO is bi-directional if the | ||
330 | underlying file descriptor is. This is normally the case | ||
331 | for sockets but not the case for stdio descriptors. | ||
332 | |||
333 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_s_null(void); | ||
334 | Read and write as much data as you like, it all disappears | ||
335 | into this BIO. | ||
336 | |||
337 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_buffer(void); | ||
338 | - BIO_get_buffer_num_lines(BIO *bio) - return the number of | ||
339 | complete lines in the buffer. | ||
340 | - BIO_set_buffer_size(BIO *bio, long size) - set the size of | ||
341 | the buffers. | ||
342 | This type performs input and output buffering. It performs | ||
343 | both at the same time. The size of the buffer can be set | ||
344 | via the set buffer size option. Data buffered for output is | ||
345 | only written when the buffer fills. | ||
346 | |||
347 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_ssl(void); | ||
348 | - BIO_set_ssl(BIO *bio, SSL *ssl, int close_flag) - the SSL | ||
349 | structure to use. | ||
350 | - BIO_get_ssl(BIO *bio, SSL **ssl) - get the SSL structure | ||
351 | in use. | ||
352 | The SSL bio is a little different from normal BIOs because | ||
353 | the underlying SSL structure is a little different. A SSL | ||
354 | structure performs IO via a read and write BIO. These can | ||
355 | be different and are normally set via the | ||
356 | SSL_set_rbio()/SSL_set_wbio() calls. The SSL_set_fd() calls | ||
357 | are just wrappers that create socket BIOs and then call | ||
358 | SSL_set_bio() where the read and write BIOs are the same. | ||
359 | The BIO_push() operation makes the SSLs IO BIOs the same, so | ||
360 | make sure the BIO pushed is capable of two directional | ||
361 | traffic. If it is not, you will have to install the BIOs | ||
362 | via the more conventional SSL_set_bio() call. BIO_pop() will retrieve | ||
363 | the 'SSL read' BIO. | ||
364 | |||
365 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_md(void); | ||
366 | - BIO_set_md(BIO *bio, EVP_MD *md) - set the message digest | ||
367 | to use. | ||
368 | - BIO_get_md(BIO *bio, EVP_MD **mdp) - return the digest | ||
369 | method in use in mdp, return 0 if not set yet. | ||
370 | - BIO_reset() reinitializes the digest (EVP_DigestInit()) | ||
371 | and passes the reset to the underlying BIOs. | ||
372 | All data read or written via BIO_read() or BIO_write() to | ||
373 | this BIO will be added to the calculated digest. This | ||
374 | implies that this BIO is only one directional. If read and | ||
375 | write operations are performed, two separate BIO_f_md() BIOs | ||
376 | are reuqired to generate digests on both the input and the | ||
377 | output. BIO_gets(BIO *bio, char *md, int size) will place the | ||
378 | generated digest into 'md' and return the number of bytes. | ||
379 | The EVP_MAX_MD_SIZE should probably be used to size the 'md' | ||
380 | array. Reading the digest will also reset it. | ||
381 | |||
382 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_cipher(void); | ||
383 | - BIO_reset() reinitializes the cipher. | ||
384 | - BIO_flush() should be called when the last bytes have been | ||
385 | output to flush the final block of block ciphers. | ||
386 | - BIO_get_cipher_status(BIO *b), when called after the last | ||
387 | read from a cipher BIO, returns non-zero if the data | ||
388 | decrypted correctly, otherwise, 0. | ||
389 | - BIO_set_cipher(BIO *b, EVP_CIPHER *c, unsigned char *key, | ||
390 | unsigned char *iv, int encrypt) This function is used to | ||
391 | setup a cipher BIO. The length of key and iv are | ||
392 | specified by the choice of EVP_CIPHER. Encrypt is 1 to | ||
393 | encrypt and 0 to decrypt. | ||
394 | |||
395 | BIO_METHOD *BIO_f_base64(void); | ||
396 | - BIO_flush() should be called when the last bytes have been output. | ||
397 | This BIO base64 encodes when writing and base64 decodes when | ||
398 | reading. It will scan the input until a suitable begin line | ||
399 | is found. After reading data, BIO_reset() will reset the | ||
400 | BIO to start scanning again. Do not mix reading and writing | ||
401 | on the same base64 BIO. It is meant as a single stream BIO. | ||
402 | |||
403 | Directions type | ||
404 | both BIO_s_mem() | ||
405 | one/both BIO_s_file() | ||
406 | both BIO_s_fd() | ||
407 | both BIO_s_socket() | ||
408 | both BIO_s_null() | ||
409 | both BIO_f_buffer() | ||
410 | one BIO_f_md() | ||
411 | one BIO_f_cipher() | ||
412 | one BIO_f_base64() | ||
413 | both BIO_f_ssl() | ||
414 | |||
415 | It is easy to mix one and two directional BIOs, all one has | ||
416 | to do is to keep two separate BIO pointers for reading and | ||
417 | writing and be careful about usage of underlying BIOs. The | ||
418 | SSL bio by it's very nature has to be two directional but | ||
419 | the BIO_push() command will push the one BIO into the SSL | ||
420 | BIO for both reading and writing. | ||
421 | |||
422 | The best example program to look at is apps/enc.c and/or perhaps apps/dgst.c. | ||
423 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/blowfish.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/blowfish.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a7f425b32 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/blowfish.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ | |||
1 | The Blowfish library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | Blowfish is a block cipher that operates on 64bit (8 byte) quantities. It | ||
4 | uses variable size key, but 128bit (16 byte) key would normally be considered | ||
5 | good. It can be used in all the modes that DES can be used. This | ||
6 | library implements the ecb, cbc, cfb64, ofb64 modes. | ||
7 | |||
8 | Blowfish is quite a bit faster that DES, and much faster than IDEA or | ||
9 | RC2. It is one of the faster block ciphers. | ||
10 | |||
11 | For all calls that have an 'input' and 'output' variables, they can be the | ||
12 | same. | ||
13 | |||
14 | This library requires the inclusion of 'blowfish.h'. | ||
15 | |||
16 | All of the encryption functions take what is called an BF_KEY as an | ||
17 | argument. An BF_KEY is an expanded form of the Blowfish key. | ||
18 | For all modes of the Blowfish algorithm, the BF_KEY used for | ||
19 | decryption is the same one that was used for encryption. | ||
20 | |||
21 | The define BF_ENCRYPT is passed to specify encryption for the functions | ||
22 | that require an encryption/decryption flag. BF_DECRYPT is passed to | ||
23 | specify decryption. | ||
24 | |||
25 | Please note that any of the encryption modes specified in my DES library | ||
26 | could be used with Blowfish. I have only implemented ecb, cbc, cfb64 and | ||
27 | ofb64 for the following reasons. | ||
28 | - ecb is the basic Blowfish encryption. | ||
29 | - cbc is the normal 'chaining' form for block ciphers. | ||
30 | - cfb64 can be used to encrypt single characters, therefore input and output | ||
31 | do not need to be a multiple of 8. | ||
32 | - ofb64 is similar to cfb64 but is more like a stream cipher, not as | ||
33 | secure (not cipher feedback) but it does not have an encrypt/decrypt mode. | ||
34 | - If you want triple Blowfish, thats 384 bits of key and you must be totally | ||
35 | obsessed with security. Still, if you want it, it is simple enough to | ||
36 | copy the function from the DES library and change the des_encrypt to | ||
37 | BF_encrypt; an exercise left for the paranoid reader :-). | ||
38 | |||
39 | The functions are as follows: | ||
40 | |||
41 | void BF_set_key( | ||
42 | BF_KEY *ks; | ||
43 | int len; | ||
44 | unsigned char *key; | ||
45 | BF_set_key converts an 'len' byte key into a BF_KEY. | ||
46 | A 'ks' is an expanded form of the 'key' which is used to | ||
47 | perform actual encryption. It can be regenerated from the Blowfish key | ||
48 | so it only needs to be kept when encryption or decryption is about | ||
49 | to occur. Don't save or pass around BF_KEY's since they | ||
50 | are CPU architecture dependent, 'key's are not. Blowfish is an | ||
51 | interesting cipher in that it can be used with a variable length | ||
52 | key. 'len' is the length of 'key' to be used as the key. | ||
53 | A 'len' of 16 is recomended by me, but blowfish can use upto | ||
54 | 72 bytes. As a warning, blowfish has a very very slow set_key | ||
55 | function, it actually runs BF_encrypt 521 times. | ||
56 | |||
57 | void BF_encrypt(unsigned long *data, BF_KEY *key); | ||
58 | void BF_decrypt(unsigned long *data, BF_KEY *key); | ||
59 | These are the Blowfish encryption function that gets called by just | ||
60 | about every other Blowfish routine in the library. You should not | ||
61 | use this function except to implement 'modes' of Blowfish. | ||
62 | I say this because the | ||
63 | functions that call this routine do the conversion from 'char *' to | ||
64 | long, and this needs to be done to make sure 'non-aligned' memory | ||
65 | access do not occur. | ||
66 | Data is a pointer to 2 unsigned long's and key is the | ||
67 | BF_KEY to use. | ||
68 | |||
69 | void BF_ecb_encrypt( | ||
70 | unsigned char *in, | ||
71 | unsigned char *out, | ||
72 | BF_KEY *key, | ||
73 | int encrypt); | ||
74 | This is the basic Electronic Code Book form of Blowfish (in DES this | ||
75 | mode is called Electronic Code Book so I'm going to use the term | ||
76 | for blowfish as well. | ||
77 | Input is encrypted into output using the key represented by | ||
78 | key. Depending on the encrypt, encryption or | ||
79 | decryption occurs. Input is 8 bytes long and output is 8 bytes. | ||
80 | |||
81 | void BF_cbc_encrypt( | ||
82 | unsigned char *in, | ||
83 | unsigned char *out, | ||
84 | long length, | ||
85 | BF_KEY *ks, | ||
86 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
87 | int encrypt); | ||
88 | This routine implements Blowfish in Cipher Block Chaining mode. | ||
89 | Input, which should be a multiple of 8 bytes is encrypted | ||
90 | (or decrypted) to output which will also be a multiple of 8 bytes. | ||
91 | The number of bytes is in length (and from what I've said above, | ||
92 | should be a multiple of 8). If length is not a multiple of 8, bad | ||
93 | things will probably happen. ivec is the initialisation vector. | ||
94 | This function updates iv after each call so that it can be passed to | ||
95 | the next call to BF_cbc_encrypt(). | ||
96 | |||
97 | void BF_cfb64_encrypt( | ||
98 | unsigned char *in, | ||
99 | unsigned char *out, | ||
100 | long length, | ||
101 | BF_KEY *schedule, | ||
102 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
103 | int *num, | ||
104 | int encrypt); | ||
105 | This is one of the more useful functions in this Blowfish library, it | ||
106 | implements CFB mode of Blowfish with 64bit feedback. | ||
107 | This allows you to encrypt an arbitrary number of bytes, | ||
108 | you do not require 8 byte padding. Each call to this | ||
109 | routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec | ||
110 | and num. Num contains 'how far' we are though ivec. | ||
111 | 'Encrypt' is used to indicate encryption or decryption. | ||
112 | CFB64 mode operates by using the cipher to generate a stream | ||
113 | of bytes which is used to encrypt the plain text. | ||
114 | The cipher text is then encrypted to generate the next 64 bits to | ||
115 | be xored (incrementally) with the next 64 bits of plain | ||
116 | text. As can be seen from this, to encrypt or decrypt, | ||
117 | the same 'cipher stream' needs to be generated but the way the next | ||
118 | block of data is gathered for encryption is different for | ||
119 | encryption and decryption. | ||
120 | |||
121 | void BF_ofb64_encrypt( | ||
122 | unsigned char *in, | ||
123 | unsigned char *out, | ||
124 | long length, | ||
125 | BF_KEY *schedule, | ||
126 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
127 | int *num); | ||
128 | This functions implements OFB mode of Blowfish with 64bit feedback. | ||
129 | This allows you to encrypt an arbitrary number of bytes, | ||
130 | you do not require 8 byte padding. Each call to this | ||
131 | routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec | ||
132 | and num. Num contains 'how far' we are though ivec. | ||
133 | This is in effect a stream cipher, there is no encryption or | ||
134 | decryption mode. | ||
135 | |||
136 | For reading passwords, I suggest using des_read_pw_string() from my DES library. | ||
137 | To generate a password from a text string, I suggest using MD5 (or MD2) to | ||
138 | produce a 16 byte message digest that can then be passed directly to | ||
139 | BF_set_key(). | ||
140 | |||
141 | ===== | ||
142 | For more information about the specific Blowfish modes in this library | ||
143 | (ecb, cbc, cfb and ofb), read the section entitled 'Modes of DES' from the | ||
144 | documentation on my DES library. What is said about DES is directly | ||
145 | applicable for Blowfish. | ||
146 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bn.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bn.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..47be23b6ea --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/bn.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ | |||
1 | The Big Number library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | #include "bn.h" when using this library. | ||
4 | |||
5 | This big number library was written for use in implementing the RSA and DH | ||
6 | public key encryption algorithms. As such, features such as negative | ||
7 | numbers have not been extensively tested but they should work as expected. | ||
8 | This library uses dynamic memory allocation for storing its data structures | ||
9 | and so there are no limit on the size of the numbers manipulated by these | ||
10 | routines but there is always the requirement to check return codes from | ||
11 | functions just in case a memory allocation error has occurred. | ||
12 | |||
13 | The basic object in this library is a BIGNUM. It is used to hold a single | ||
14 | large integer. This type should be considered opaque and fields should not | ||
15 | be modified or accessed directly. | ||
16 | typedef struct bignum_st | ||
17 | { | ||
18 | int top; /* Index of last used d. */ | ||
19 | BN_ULONG *d; /* Pointer to an array of 'BITS2' bit chunks. */ | ||
20 | int max; /* Size of the d array. */ | ||
21 | int neg; | ||
22 | } BIGNUM; | ||
23 | The big number is stored in a malloced array of BN_ULONG's. A BN_ULONG can | ||
24 | be either 16, 32 or 64 bits in size, depending on the 'number of bits' | ||
25 | specified in bn.h. | ||
26 | The 'd' field is this array. 'max' is the size of the 'd' array that has | ||
27 | been allocated. 'top' is the 'last' entry being used, so for a value of 4, | ||
28 | bn.d[0]=4 and bn.top=1. 'neg' is 1 if the number is negative. | ||
29 | When a BIGNUM is '0', the 'd' field can be NULL and top == 0. | ||
30 | |||
31 | Various routines in this library require the use of 'temporary' BIGNUM | ||
32 | variables during their execution. Due to the use of dynamic memory | ||
33 | allocation to create BIGNUMs being rather expensive when used in | ||
34 | conjunction with repeated subroutine calls, the BN_CTX structure is | ||
35 | used. This structure contains BN_CTX BIGNUMs. BN_CTX | ||
36 | is the maximum number of temporary BIGNUMs any publicly exported | ||
37 | function will use. | ||
38 | |||
39 | #define BN_CTX 12 | ||
40 | typedef struct bignum_ctx | ||
41 | { | ||
42 | int tos; /* top of stack */ | ||
43 | BIGNUM *bn[BN_CTX]; /* The variables */ | ||
44 | } BN_CTX; | ||
45 | |||
46 | The functions that follow have been grouped according to function. Most | ||
47 | arithmetic functions return a result in the first argument, sometimes this | ||
48 | first argument can also be an input parameter, sometimes it cannot. These | ||
49 | restrictions are documented. | ||
50 | |||
51 | extern BIGNUM *BN_value_one; | ||
52 | There is one variable defined by this library, a BIGNUM which contains the | ||
53 | number 1. This variable is useful for use in comparisons and assignment. | ||
54 | |||
55 | Get Size functions. | ||
56 | |||
57 | int BN_num_bits(BIGNUM *a); | ||
58 | This function returns the size of 'a' in bits. | ||
59 | |||
60 | int BN_num_bytes(BIGNUM *a); | ||
61 | This function (macro) returns the size of 'a' in bytes. | ||
62 | For conversion of BIGNUMs to byte streams, this is the number of | ||
63 | bytes the output string will occupy. If the output byte | ||
64 | format specifies that the 'top' bit indicates if the number is | ||
65 | signed, so an extra '0' byte is required if the top bit on a | ||
66 | positive number is being written, it is upto the application to | ||
67 | make this adjustment. Like I said at the start, I don't | ||
68 | really support negative numbers :-). | ||
69 | |||
70 | Creation/Destruction routines. | ||
71 | |||
72 | BIGNUM *BN_new(); | ||
73 | Return a new BIGNUM object. The number initially has a value of 0. If | ||
74 | there is an error, NULL is returned. | ||
75 | |||
76 | void BN_free(BIGNUM *a); | ||
77 | Free()s a BIGNUM. | ||
78 | |||
79 | void BN_clear(BIGNUM *a); | ||
80 | Sets 'a' to a value of 0 and also zeros all unused allocated | ||
81 | memory. This function is used to clear a variable of 'sensitive' | ||
82 | data that was held in it. | ||
83 | |||
84 | void BN_clear_free(BIGNUM *a); | ||
85 | This function zeros the memory used by 'a' and then free()'s it. | ||
86 | This function should be used to BN_free() BIGNUMS that have held | ||
87 | sensitive numeric values like RSA private key values. Both this | ||
88 | function and BN_clear tend to only be used by RSA and DH routines. | ||
89 | |||
90 | BN_CTX *BN_CTX_new(void); | ||
91 | Returns a new BN_CTX. NULL on error. | ||
92 | |||
93 | void BN_CTX_free(BN_CTX *c); | ||
94 | Free a BN_CTX structure. The BIGNUMs in 'c' are BN_clear_free()ed. | ||
95 | |||
96 | BIGNUM *bn_expand(BIGNUM *b, int bits); | ||
97 | This is an internal function that should not normally be used. It | ||
98 | ensures that 'b' has enough room for a 'bits' bit number. It is | ||
99 | mostly used by the various BIGNUM routines. If there is an error, | ||
100 | NULL is returned. if not, 'b' is returned. | ||
101 | |||
102 | BIGNUM *BN_copy(BIGNUM *to, BIGNUM *from); | ||
103 | The 'from' is copied into 'to'. NULL is returned if there is an | ||
104 | error, otherwise 'to' is returned. | ||
105 | |||
106 | BIGNUM *BN_dup(BIGNUM *a); | ||
107 | A new BIGNUM is created and returned containing the value of 'a'. | ||
108 | NULL is returned on error. | ||
109 | |||
110 | Comparison and Test Functions. | ||
111 | |||
112 | int BN_is_zero(BIGNUM *a) | ||
113 | Return 1 if 'a' is zero, else 0. | ||
114 | |||
115 | int BN_is_one(a) | ||
116 | Return 1 is 'a' is one, else 0. | ||
117 | |||
118 | int BN_is_word(a,w) | ||
119 | Return 1 if 'a' == w, else 0. 'w' is a BN_ULONG. | ||
120 | |||
121 | int BN_cmp(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b); | ||
122 | Return -1 if 'a' is less than 'b', 0 if 'a' and 'b' are the same | ||
123 | and 1 is 'a' is greater than 'b'. This is a signed comparison. | ||
124 | |||
125 | int BN_ucmp(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b); | ||
126 | This function is the same as BN_cmp except that the comparison | ||
127 | ignores the sign of the numbers. | ||
128 | |||
129 | Arithmetic Functions | ||
130 | For all of these functions, 0 is returned if there is an error and 1 is | ||
131 | returned for success. The return value should always be checked. eg. | ||
132 | if (!BN_add(r,a,b)) goto err; | ||
133 | Unless explicitly mentioned, the 'return' value can be one of the | ||
134 | 'parameters' to the function. | ||
135 | |||
136 | int BN_add(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b); | ||
137 | Add 'a' and 'b' and return the result in 'r'. This is r=a+b. | ||
138 | |||
139 | int BN_sub(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b); | ||
140 | Subtract 'a' from 'b' and put the result in 'r'. This is r=a-b. | ||
141 | |||
142 | int BN_lshift(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
143 | Shift 'a' left by 'n' bits. This is r=a*(2^n). | ||
144 | |||
145 | int BN_lshift1(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a); | ||
146 | Shift 'a' left by 1 bit. This form is more efficient than | ||
147 | BN_lshift(r,a,1). This is r=a*2. | ||
148 | |||
149 | int BN_rshift(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
150 | Shift 'a' right by 'n' bits. This is r=int(a/(2^n)). | ||
151 | |||
152 | int BN_rshift1(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a); | ||
153 | Shift 'a' right by 1 bit. This form is more efficient than | ||
154 | BN_rshift(r,a,1). This is r=int(a/2). | ||
155 | |||
156 | int BN_mul(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b); | ||
157 | Multiply a by b and return the result in 'r'. 'r' must not be | ||
158 | either 'a' or 'b'. It has to be a different BIGNUM. | ||
159 | This is r=a*b. | ||
160 | |||
161 | int BN_sqr(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
162 | Multiply a by a and return the result in 'r'. 'r' must not be | ||
163 | 'a'. This function is alot faster than BN_mul(r,a,a). This is r=a*a. | ||
164 | |||
165 | int BN_div(BIGNUM *dv, BIGNUM *rem, BIGNUM *m, BIGNUM *d, BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
166 | Divide 'm' by 'd' and return the result in 'dv' and the remainder | ||
167 | in 'rem'. Either of 'dv' or 'rem' can be NULL in which case that | ||
168 | value is not returned. 'ctx' needs to be passed as a source of | ||
169 | temporary BIGNUM variables. | ||
170 | This is dv=int(m/d), rem=m%d. | ||
171 | |||
172 | int BN_mod(BIGNUM *rem, BIGNUM *m, BIGNUM *d, BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
173 | Find the remainder of 'm' divided by 'd' and return it in 'rem'. | ||
174 | 'ctx' holds the temporary BIGNUMs required by this function. | ||
175 | This function is more efficient than BN_div(NULL,rem,m,d,ctx); | ||
176 | This is rem=m%d. | ||
177 | |||
178 | int BN_mod_mul(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *b, BIGNUM *m,BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
179 | Multiply 'a' by 'b' and return the remainder when divided by 'm'. | ||
180 | 'ctx' holds the temporary BIGNUMs required by this function. | ||
181 | This is r=(a*b)%m. | ||
182 | |||
183 | int BN_mod_exp(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *p, BIGNUM *m,BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
184 | Raise 'a' to the 'p' power and return the remainder when divided by | ||
185 | 'm'. 'ctx' holds the temporary BIGNUMs required by this function. | ||
186 | This is r=(a^p)%m. | ||
187 | |||
188 | int BN_reciprocal(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *m, BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
189 | Return the reciprocal of 'm'. 'ctx' holds the temporary variables | ||
190 | required. This function returns -1 on error, otherwise it returns | ||
191 | the number of bits 'r' is shifted left to make 'r' into an integer. | ||
192 | This number of bits shifted is required in BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(). | ||
193 | This is r=(1/m)<<(BN_num_bits(m)+1). | ||
194 | |||
195 | int BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(BIGNUM *r, BIGNUM *x, BIGNUM *y, BIGNUM *m, | ||
196 | BIGNUM *i, int nb, BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
197 | This function is used to perform an efficient BN_mod_mul() | ||
198 | operation. If one is going to repeatedly perform BN_mod_mul() with | ||
199 | the same modulus is worth calculating the reciprocal of the modulus | ||
200 | and then using this function. This operation uses the fact that | ||
201 | a/b == a*r where r is the reciprocal of b. On modern computers | ||
202 | multiplication is very fast and big number division is very slow. | ||
203 | 'x' is multiplied by 'y' and then divided by 'm' and the remainder | ||
204 | is returned. 'i' is the reciprocal of 'm' and 'nb' is the number | ||
205 | of bits as returned from BN_reciprocal(). Normal usage is as follows. | ||
206 | bn=BN_reciprocal(i,m); | ||
207 | for (...) | ||
208 | { BN_mod_mul_reciprocal(r,x,y,m,i,bn,ctx); } | ||
209 | This is r=(x*y)%m. Internally it is approximately | ||
210 | r=(x*y)-m*(x*y/m) or r=(x*y)-m*((x*y*i) >> bn) | ||
211 | This function is used in BN_mod_exp() and BN_is_prime(). | ||
212 | |||
213 | Assignment Operations | ||
214 | |||
215 | int BN_one(BIGNUM *a) | ||
216 | Set 'a' to hold the value one. | ||
217 | This is a=1. | ||
218 | |||
219 | int BN_zero(BIGNUM *a) | ||
220 | Set 'a' to hold the value zero. | ||
221 | This is a=0. | ||
222 | |||
223 | int BN_set_word(BIGNUM *a, unsigned long w); | ||
224 | Set 'a' to hold the value of 'w'. 'w' is an unsigned long. | ||
225 | This is a=w. | ||
226 | |||
227 | unsigned long BN_get_word(BIGNUM *a); | ||
228 | Returns 'a' in an unsigned long. Not remarkably, often 'a' will | ||
229 | be biger than a word, in which case 0xffffffffL is returned. | ||
230 | |||
231 | Word Operations | ||
232 | These functions are much more efficient that the normal bignum arithmetic | ||
233 | operations. | ||
234 | |||
235 | BN_ULONG BN_mod_word(BIGNUM *a, unsigned long w); | ||
236 | Return the remainder of 'a' divided by 'w'. | ||
237 | This is return(a%w). | ||
238 | |||
239 | int BN_add_word(BIGNUM *a, unsigned long w); | ||
240 | Add 'w' to 'a'. This function does not take the sign of 'a' into | ||
241 | account. This is a+=w; | ||
242 | |||
243 | Bit operations. | ||
244 | |||
245 | int BN_is_bit_set(BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
246 | This function return 1 if bit 'n' is set in 'a' else 0. | ||
247 | |||
248 | int BN_set_bit(BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
249 | This function sets bit 'n' to 1 in 'a'. | ||
250 | This is a&= ~(1<<n); | ||
251 | |||
252 | int BN_clear_bit(BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
253 | This function sets bit 'n' to zero in 'a'. Return 0 if less | ||
254 | than 'n' bits in 'a' else 1. This is a&= ~(1<<n); | ||
255 | |||
256 | int BN_mask_bits(BIGNUM *a, int n); | ||
257 | Truncate 'a' to n bits long. This is a&= ~((~0)<<n) | ||
258 | |||
259 | Format conversion routines. | ||
260 | |||
261 | BIGNUM *BN_bin2bn(unsigned char *s, int len,BIGNUM *ret); | ||
262 | This function converts 'len' bytes in 's' into a BIGNUM which | ||
263 | is put in 'ret'. If ret is NULL, a new BIGNUM is created. | ||
264 | Either this new BIGNUM or ret is returned. The number is | ||
265 | assumed to be in bigendian form in 's'. By this I mean that | ||
266 | to 'ret' is created as follows for 'len' == 5. | ||
267 | ret = s[0]*2^32 + s[1]*2^24 + s[2]*2^16 + s[3]*2^8 + s[4]; | ||
268 | This function cannot be used to convert negative numbers. It | ||
269 | is always assumed the number is positive. The application | ||
270 | needs to diddle the 'neg' field of th BIGNUM its self. | ||
271 | The better solution would be to save the numbers in ASN.1 format | ||
272 | since this is a defined standard for storing big numbers. | ||
273 | Look at the functions | ||
274 | |||
275 | ASN1_INTEGER *BN_to_ASN1_INTEGER(BIGNUM *bn, ASN1_INTEGER *ai); | ||
276 | BIGNUM *ASN1_INTEGER_to_BN(ASN1_INTEGER *ai,BIGNUM *bn); | ||
277 | int i2d_ASN1_INTEGER(ASN1_INTEGER *a,unsigned char **pp); | ||
278 | ASN1_INTEGER *d2i_ASN1_INTEGER(ASN1_INTEGER **a,unsigned char **pp, | ||
279 | long length; | ||
280 | |||
281 | int BN_bn2bin(BIGNUM *a, unsigned char *to); | ||
282 | This function converts 'a' to a byte string which is put into | ||
283 | 'to'. The representation is big-endian in that the most | ||
284 | significant byte of 'a' is put into to[0]. This function | ||
285 | returns the number of bytes used to hold 'a'. BN_num_bytes(a) | ||
286 | would return the same value and can be used to determine how | ||
287 | large 'to' needs to be. If the number is negative, this | ||
288 | information is lost. Since this library was written to | ||
289 | manipulate large positive integers, the inability to save and | ||
290 | restore them is not considered to be a problem by me :-). | ||
291 | As for BN_bin2bn(), look at the ASN.1 integer encoding funtions | ||
292 | for SSLeay. They use BN_bin2bn() and BN_bn2bin() internally. | ||
293 | |||
294 | char *BN_bn2ascii(BIGNUM *a); | ||
295 | This function returns a malloc()ed string that contains the | ||
296 | ascii hexadecimal encoding of 'a'. The number is in bigendian | ||
297 | format with a '-' in front if the number is negative. | ||
298 | |||
299 | int BN_ascii2bn(BIGNUM **bn, char *a); | ||
300 | The inverse of BN_bn2ascii. The function returns the number of | ||
301 | characters from 'a' were processed in generating a the bignum. | ||
302 | error is inticated by 0 being returned. The number is a | ||
303 | hex digit string, optionally with a leading '-'. If *bn | ||
304 | is null, a BIGNUM is created and returned via that variable. | ||
305 | |||
306 | int BN_print_fp(FILE *fp, BIGNUM *a); | ||
307 | 'a' is printed to file pointer 'fp'. It is in the same format | ||
308 | that is output from BN_bn2ascii(). 0 is returned on error, | ||
309 | 1 if things are ok. | ||
310 | |||
311 | int BN_print(BIO *bp, BIGNUM *a); | ||
312 | Same as BN_print except that the output is done to the SSLeay libraries | ||
313 | BIO routines. BN_print_fp() actually calls this function. | ||
314 | |||
315 | Miscellaneous Routines. | ||
316 | |||
317 | int BN_rand(BIGNUM *rnd, int bits, int top, int bottom); | ||
318 | This function returns in 'rnd' a random BIGNUM that is bits | ||
319 | long. If bottom is 1, the number returned is odd. If top is set, | ||
320 | the top 2 bits of the number are set. This is useful because if | ||
321 | this is set, 2 'n; bit numbers multiplied together will return a 2n | ||
322 | bit number. If top was not set, they could produce a 2n-1 bit | ||
323 | number. | ||
324 | |||
325 | BIGNUM *BN_mod_inverse(BIGNUM *a, BIGNUM *n,BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
326 | This function create a new BIGNUM and returns it. This number | ||
327 | is the inverse mod 'n' of 'a'. By this it is meant that the | ||
328 | returned value 'r' satisfies (a*r)%n == 1. This function is | ||
329 | used in the generation of RSA keys. 'ctx', as per usual, | ||
330 | is used to hold temporary variables that are required by the | ||
331 | function. NULL is returned on error. | ||
332 | |||
333 | int BN_gcd(BIGNUM *r,BIGNUM *a,BIGNUM *b,BN_CTX *ctx); | ||
334 | 'r' has the greatest common divisor of 'a' and 'b'. 'ctx' is | ||
335 | used for temporary variables and 0 is returned on error. | ||
336 | |||
337 | int BN_is_prime(BIGNUM *p,int nchecks,void (*callback)(),BN_CTX *ctx, | ||
338 | char *cb_arg); | ||
339 | This function is used to check if a BIGNUM ('p') is prime. | ||
340 | It performs this test by using the Miller-Rabin randomised | ||
341 | primality test. This is a probalistic test that requires a | ||
342 | number of rounds to ensure the number is prime to a high | ||
343 | degree of probability. Since this can take quite some time, a | ||
344 | callback function can be passed and it will be called each | ||
345 | time 'p' passes a round of the prime testing. 'callback' will | ||
346 | be called as follows, callback(1,n,cb_arg) where n is the number of | ||
347 | the round, just passed. As per usual 'ctx' contains temporary | ||
348 | variables used. If ctx is NULL, it does not matter, a local version | ||
349 | will be malloced. This parameter is present to save some mallocing | ||
350 | inside the function but probably could be removed. | ||
351 | 0 is returned on error. | ||
352 | 'ncheck' is the number of Miller-Rabin tests to run. It is | ||
353 | suggested to use the value 'BN_prime_checks' by default. | ||
354 | |||
355 | BIGNUM *BN_generate_prime( | ||
356 | int bits, | ||
357 | int strong, | ||
358 | BIGNUM *a, | ||
359 | BIGNUM *rems, | ||
360 | void (*callback)()); | ||
361 | char *cb_arg | ||
362 | This function is used to generate prime numbers. It returns a | ||
363 | new BIGNUM that has a high probability of being a prime. | ||
364 | 'bits' is the number of bits that | ||
365 | are to be in the prime. If 'strong' is true, the returned prime | ||
366 | will also be a strong prime ((p-1)/2 is also prime). | ||
367 | While searching for the prime ('p'), we | ||
368 | can add the requirement that the prime fill the following | ||
369 | condition p%a == rem. This can be used to help search for | ||
370 | primes with specific features, which is required when looking | ||
371 | for primes suitable for use with certain 'g' values in the | ||
372 | Diffie-Hellman key exchange algorithm. If 'a' is NULL, | ||
373 | this condition is not checked. If rem is NULL, rem is assumed | ||
374 | to be 1. Since this search for a prime | ||
375 | can take quite some time, if callback is not NULL, it is called | ||
376 | in the following situations. | ||
377 | We have a suspected prime (from a quick sieve), | ||
378 | callback(0,sus_prime++,cb_arg). Each item to be passed to BN_is_prime(). | ||
379 | callback(1,round++,cb_arg). Each successful 'round' in BN_is_prime(). | ||
380 | callback(2,round,cb_arg). For each successful BN_is_prime() test. | ||
381 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ca.1 b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ca.1 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5b0c5a198d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ca.1 | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ | |||
1 | From eay@orb.mincom.oz.au Thu Dec 28 23:56:45 1995 | ||
2 | Received: by orb.mincom.oz.au id AA07374 | ||
3 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for eay); Thu, 28 Dec 1995 13:56:45 +1000 | ||
4 | Date: Thu, 28 Dec 1995 13:56:45 +1000 (EST) | ||
5 | From: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au> | ||
6 | X-Sender: eay@orb | ||
7 | To: sameer <sameer@c2.org> | ||
8 | Cc: ssleay@mincom.oz.au | ||
9 | Subject: Re: 'ca' | ||
10 | In-Reply-To: <199512230440.UAA23410@infinity.c2.org> | ||
11 | Message-Id: <Pine.SOL.3.91.951228133525.7269A-100000@orb> | ||
12 | Mime-Version: 1.0 | ||
13 | Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=US-ASCII | ||
14 | Status: RO | ||
15 | X-Status: | ||
16 | |||
17 | On Fri, 22 Dec 1995, sameer wrote: | ||
18 | > I could use documentation on 'ca'. Thanks. | ||
19 | |||
20 | Very quickly. | ||
21 | The ca program uses the ssleay.conf file for most of its configuration | ||
22 | |||
23 | ./ca -help | ||
24 | |||
25 | -verbose - Talk alot while doing things | ||
26 | -config file - A config file. If you don't want to use the | ||
27 | default config file | ||
28 | -name arg - The particular CA definition to use | ||
29 | In the config file, the section to use for parameters. This lets | ||
30 | multiple setups to be contained in the one file. By default, the | ||
31 | default_ca variable is looked up in the [ ca ] section. So in the | ||
32 | shipped ssleay.conf, the CA definition used is CA_default. It could be | ||
33 | any other name. | ||
34 | -gencrl days - Generate a new CRL, days is when the next CRL is due | ||
35 | This will generate a new certificate revocion list. | ||
36 | -days arg - number of days to certify the certificate for | ||
37 | When certifiying certificates, this is the number of days to use. | ||
38 | -md arg - md to use, one of md2, md5, sha or sha1 | ||
39 | -policy arg - The CA 'policy' to support | ||
40 | I'll describe this later, but there are 2 policies definied in the | ||
41 | shipped ssleay.conf | ||
42 | -keyfile arg - PEM RSA private key file | ||
43 | -key arg - key to decode the RSA private key if it is encrypted | ||
44 | since we need to keep the CA's RSA key encrypted | ||
45 | -cert - The CA certificate | ||
46 | -in file - The input PEM encoded certificate request(s) | ||
47 | -out file - Where to put the output file(s) | ||
48 | -outdir dir - Where to put output certificates | ||
49 | The -out options concatinates all the output certificied | ||
50 | certificates to one file, -outdir puts them in a directory, | ||
51 | named by serial number. | ||
52 | -infiles .... - The last argument, requests to process | ||
53 | The certificate requests to process, -in is the same. | ||
54 | |||
55 | Just about all the above have default values defined in ssleay.conf. | ||
56 | |||
57 | The key variables in ssleay.conf are (for the pariticular '-name' being | ||
58 | used, in the default, it is CA_default). | ||
59 | |||
60 | dir is where all the CA database stuff is kept. | ||
61 | certs is where all the previously issued certificates are kept. | ||
62 | The database is a simple text database containing the following tab separated | ||
63 | fields. | ||
64 | status: a value of 'R' - revoked, 'E' -expired or 'V' valid. | ||
65 | issued date: When the certificate was certified. | ||
66 | revoked date: When it was revoked, blank if not revoked. | ||
67 | serial number: The certificate serial number. | ||
68 | certificate: Where the certificate is located. | ||
69 | CN: The name of the certificate. | ||
70 | |||
71 | The demo file has quite a few made up values it it. The last 2 were | ||
72 | added by the ca program and are acurate. | ||
73 | The CA program does not update the 'certificate' file correctly right now. | ||
74 | The serial field should be unique as should the CN/status combination. | ||
75 | The ca program checks these at startup. What still needs to be | ||
76 | wrtten is a program to 'regenerate' the data base file from the issued | ||
77 | certificate list (and a CRL list). | ||
78 | |||
79 | Back to the CA_default variables. | ||
80 | |||
81 | Most of the variables are commented. | ||
82 | |||
83 | policy is the default policy. | ||
84 | |||
85 | Ok for policies, they define the order and which fields must be present | ||
86 | in the certificate request and what gets filled in. | ||
87 | |||
88 | So a value of | ||
89 | countryName = match | ||
90 | means that the country name must match the CA certificate. | ||
91 | organizationalUnitName = optional | ||
92 | The org.Unit,Name does not have to be present and | ||
93 | commonName = supplied | ||
94 | commonName must be supplied in the certificate request. | ||
95 | |||
96 | For the 'policy_match' polocy, the order of the attributes in the | ||
97 | generated certiticate would be | ||
98 | countryName | ||
99 | stateOrProvinceName | ||
100 | organizationName | ||
101 | organizationalUnitName | ||
102 | commonName | ||
103 | emailAddress | ||
104 | |||
105 | Have a play, it sort of makes sense. If you think about how the persona | ||
106 | requests operate, it is similar to the 'policy_match' policy and the | ||
107 | 'policy_anything' is similar to what versign is doing. | ||
108 | |||
109 | I hope this helps a bit. Some backend scripts are definitly needed to | ||
110 | update the database and to make certificate revocion easy. All | ||
111 | certificates issued should also be kept forever (or until they expire?) | ||
112 | |||
113 | hope this helps | ||
114 | eric (who has to run off an buy some cheap knee pads for the caving in 4 | ||
115 | days time :-) | ||
116 | |||
117 | -- | ||
118 | Eric Young | Signature removed since it was generating | ||
119 | AARNet: eay@mincom.oz.au | more followups than the message contents :-) | ||
120 | |||
121 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/callback.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/callback.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7ad0f7f7d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/callback.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ | |||
1 | Callback functions used in SSLeay. | ||
2 | |||
3 | -------------------------- | ||
4 | The BIO library. | ||
5 | |||
6 | Each BIO structure can have a callback defined against it. This callback is | ||
7 | called 2 times for each BIO 'function'. It is passed 6 parameters. | ||
8 | BIO_debug_callback() is an example callback which is defined in | ||
9 | crypto/buffer/bio_cb.c and is used in apps/dgst.c This is intended mostly | ||
10 | for debuging or to notify the application of IO. | ||
11 | |||
12 | long BIO_debug_callback(BIO *bio,int cmd,char *argp,int argi,long argl, | ||
13 | long ret); | ||
14 | bio is the BIO being called, cmd is the type of BIO function being called. | ||
15 | Look at the BIO_CB_* defines in buffer.h. Argp and argi are the arguments | ||
16 | passed to BIO_read(), BIO_write, BIO_gets(), BIO_puts(). In the case of | ||
17 | BIO_ctrl(), argl is also defined. The first time the callback is called, | ||
18 | before the underlying function has been executed, 0 is passed as 'ret', and | ||
19 | if the return code from the callback is not > 0, the call is aborted | ||
20 | and the returned <= 0 value is returned. | ||
21 | The second time the callback is called, the 'cmd' value also has | ||
22 | BIO_CB_RETURN logically 'or'ed with it. The 'ret' value is the value returned | ||
23 | from the actuall function call and whatever the callback returns is returned | ||
24 | from the BIO function. | ||
25 | |||
26 | BIO_set_callback(b,cb) can be used to set the callback function | ||
27 | (b is a BIO), and BIO_set_callback_arg(b,arg) can be used to | ||
28 | set the cb_arg argument in the BIO strucutre. This field is only intended | ||
29 | to be used by application, primarily in the callback function since it is | ||
30 | accessable since the BIO is passed. | ||
31 | |||
32 | -------------------------- | ||
33 | The PEM library. | ||
34 | |||
35 | The pem library only really uses one type of callback, | ||
36 | static int def_callback(char *buf, int num, int verify); | ||
37 | which is used to return a password string if required. | ||
38 | 'buf' is the buffer to put the string in. 'num' is the size of 'buf' | ||
39 | and 'verify' is used to indicate that the password should be checked. | ||
40 | This last flag is mostly used when reading a password for encryption. | ||
41 | |||
42 | For all of these functions, a NULL callback will call the above mentioned | ||
43 | default callback. This default function does not work under Windows 3.1. | ||
44 | For other machines, it will use an application defined prompt string | ||
45 | (EVP_set_pw_prompt(), which defines a library wide prompt string) | ||
46 | if defined, otherwise it will use it's own PEM password prompt. | ||
47 | It will then call EVP_read_pw_string() to get a password from the console. | ||
48 | If your application wishes to use nice fancy windows to retrieve passwords, | ||
49 | replace this function. The callback should return the number of bytes read | ||
50 | into 'buf'. If the number of bytes <= 0, it is considered an error. | ||
51 | |||
52 | Functions that take this callback are listed below. For the 'read' type | ||
53 | functions, the callback will only be required if the PEM data is encrypted. | ||
54 | |||
55 | For the Write functions, normally a password can be passed in 'kstr', of | ||
56 | 'klen' bytes which will be used if the 'enc' cipher is not NULL. If | ||
57 | 'kstr' is NULL, the callback will be used to retrieve a password. | ||
58 | |||
59 | int PEM_do_header (EVP_CIPHER_INFO *cipher, unsigned char *data,long *len, | ||
60 | int (*callback)()); | ||
61 | char *PEM_ASN1_read_bio(char *(*d2i)(),char *name,BIO *bp,char **x,int (*cb)()); | ||
62 | char *PEM_ASN1_read(char *(*d2i)(),char *name,FILE *fp,char **x,int (*cb)()); | ||
63 | int PEM_ASN1_write_bio(int (*i2d)(),char *name,BIO *bp,char *x, | ||
64 | EVP_CIPHER *enc,unsigned char *kstr,int klen,int (*callback)()); | ||
65 | int PEM_ASN1_write(int (*i2d)(),char *name,FILE *fp,char *x, | ||
66 | EVP_CIPHER *enc,unsigned char *kstr,int klen,int (*callback)()); | ||
67 | STACK *PEM_X509_INFO_read(FILE *fp, STACK *sk, int (*cb)()); | ||
68 | STACK *PEM_X509_INFO_read_bio(BIO *fp, STACK *sk, int (*cb)()); | ||
69 | |||
70 | #define PEM_write_RSAPrivateKey(fp,x,enc,kstr,klen,cb) | ||
71 | #define PEM_write_DSAPrivateKey(fp,x,enc,kstr,klen,cb) | ||
72 | #define PEM_write_bio_RSAPrivateKey(bp,x,enc,kstr,klen,cb) | ||
73 | #define PEM_write_bio_DSAPrivateKey(bp,x,enc,kstr,klen,cb) | ||
74 | #define PEM_read_SSL_SESSION(fp,x,cb) | ||
75 | #define PEM_read_X509(fp,x,cb) | ||
76 | #define PEM_read_X509_REQ(fp,x,cb) | ||
77 | #define PEM_read_X509_CRL(fp,x,cb) | ||
78 | #define PEM_read_RSAPrivateKey(fp,x,cb) | ||
79 | #define PEM_read_DSAPrivateKey(fp,x,cb) | ||
80 | #define PEM_read_PrivateKey(fp,x,cb) | ||
81 | #define PEM_read_PKCS7(fp,x,cb) | ||
82 | #define PEM_read_DHparams(fp,x,cb) | ||
83 | #define PEM_read_bio_SSL_SESSION(bp,x,cb) | ||
84 | #define PEM_read_bio_X509(bp,x,cb) | ||
85 | #define PEM_read_bio_X509_REQ(bp,x,cb) | ||
86 | #define PEM_read_bio_X509_CRL(bp,x,cb) | ||
87 | #define PEM_read_bio_RSAPrivateKey(bp,x,cb) | ||
88 | #define PEM_read_bio_DSAPrivateKey(bp,x,cb) | ||
89 | #define PEM_read_bio_PrivateKey(bp,x,cb) | ||
90 | #define PEM_read_bio_PKCS7(bp,x,cb) | ||
91 | #define PEM_read_bio_DHparams(bp,x,cb) | ||
92 | int i2d_Netscape_RSA(RSA *a, unsigned char **pp, int (*cb)()); | ||
93 | RSA *d2i_Netscape_RSA(RSA **a, unsigned char **pp, long length, int (*cb)()); | ||
94 | |||
95 | Now you will notice that macros like | ||
96 | #define PEM_write_X509(fp,x) \ | ||
97 | PEM_ASN1_write((int (*)())i2d_X509,PEM_STRING_X509,fp, \ | ||
98 | (char *)x, NULL,NULL,0,NULL) | ||
99 | Don't do encryption normally. If you want to PEM encrypt your X509 structure, | ||
100 | either just call PEM_ASN1_write directly or just define you own | ||
101 | macro variant. As you can see, this macro just sets all encryption related | ||
102 | parameters to NULL. | ||
103 | |||
104 | |||
105 | -------------------------- | ||
106 | The SSL library. | ||
107 | |||
108 | #define SSL_set_info_callback(ssl,cb) | ||
109 | #define SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(ctx,cb) | ||
110 | void callback(SSL *ssl,int location,int ret) | ||
111 | This callback is called each time around the SSL_connect()/SSL_accept() | ||
112 | state machine. So it will be called each time the SSL protocol progresses. | ||
113 | It is mostly present for use when debugging. When SSL_connect() or | ||
114 | SSL_accept() return, the location flag is SSL_CB_ACCEPT_EXIT or | ||
115 | SSL_CB_CONNECT_EXIT and 'ret' is the value about to be returned. | ||
116 | Have a look at the SSL_CB_* defines in ssl.h. If an info callback is defined | ||
117 | against the SSL_CTX, it is called unless there is one set against the SSL. | ||
118 | Have a look at | ||
119 | void client_info_callback() in apps/s_client() for an example. | ||
120 | |||
121 | Certificate verification. | ||
122 | void SSL_set_verify(SSL *s, int mode, int (*callback) ()); | ||
123 | void SSL_CTX_set_verify(SSL_CTX *ctx,int mode,int (*callback)()); | ||
124 | This callback is used to help verify client and server X509 certificates. | ||
125 | It is actually passed to X509_cert_verify(), along with the SSL structure | ||
126 | so you have to read about X509_cert_verify() :-). The SSL_CTX version is used | ||
127 | if the SSL version is not defined. X509_cert_verify() is the function used | ||
128 | by the SSL part of the library to verify certificates. This function is | ||
129 | nearly always defined by the application. | ||
130 | |||
131 | void SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx, int (*cb)(),char *arg); | ||
132 | int callback(char *arg,SSL *s,X509 *xs,STACK *cert_chain); | ||
133 | This call is used to replace the SSLeay certificate verification code. | ||
134 | The 'arg' is kept in the SSL_CTX and is passed to the callback. | ||
135 | If the callback returns 0, the certificate is rejected, otherwise it | ||
136 | is accepted. The callback is replacing the X509_cert_verify() call. | ||
137 | This feature is not often used, but if you wished to implement | ||
138 | some totally different certificate authentication system, this 'hook' is | ||
139 | vital. | ||
140 | |||
141 | SSLeay keeps a cache of session-ids against each SSL_CTX. These callbacks can | ||
142 | be used to notify the application when a SSL_SESSION is added to the cache | ||
143 | or to retrieve a SSL_SESSION that is not in the cache from the application. | ||
144 | #define SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(ctx,cb) | ||
145 | SSL_SESSION *callback(SSL *s,char *session_id,int session_id_len,int *copy); | ||
146 | If defined, this callback is called to return the SESSION_ID for the | ||
147 | session-id in 'session_id', of 'session_id_len' bytes. 'copy' is set to 1 | ||
148 | if the server is to 'take a copy' of the SSL_SESSION structure. It is 0 | ||
149 | if the SSL_SESSION is being 'passed in' so the SSLeay library is now | ||
150 | responsible for 'free()ing' the structure. Basically it is used to indicate | ||
151 | if the reference count on the SSL_SESSION structure needs to be incremented. | ||
152 | |||
153 | #define SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb(ctx,cb) | ||
154 | int callback(SSL *s, SSL_SESSION *sess); | ||
155 | When a new connection is established, if the SSL_SESSION is going to be added | ||
156 | to the cache, this callback is called. Return 1 if a 'copy' is required, | ||
157 | otherwise, return 0. This return value just causes the reference count | ||
158 | to be incremented (on return of a 1), this means the application does | ||
159 | not need to worry about incrementing the refernece count (and the | ||
160 | locking that implies in a multi-threaded application). | ||
161 | |||
162 | void SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,int (*cb)()); | ||
163 | This sets the SSL password reading function. | ||
164 | It is mostly used for windowing applications | ||
165 | and used by PEM_read_bio_X509() and PEM_read_bio_RSAPrivateKey() | ||
166 | calls inside the SSL library. The only reason this is present is because the | ||
167 | calls to PEM_* functions is hidden in the SSLeay library so you have to | ||
168 | pass in the callback some how. | ||
169 | |||
170 | #define SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(ctx,cb) | ||
171 | int callback(SSL *s,X509 **x509, EVP_PKEY **pkey); | ||
172 | Called when a client certificate is requested but there is not one set | ||
173 | against the SSL_CTX or the SSL. If the callback returns 1, x509 and | ||
174 | pkey need to point to valid data. The library will free these when | ||
175 | required so if the application wants to keep these around, increment | ||
176 | their reference counts. If 0 is returned, no client cert is | ||
177 | available. If -1 is returned, it is assumed that the callback needs | ||
178 | to be called again at a later point in time. SSL_connect will return | ||
179 | -1 and SSL_want_x509_lookup(ssl) returns true. Remember that | ||
180 | application data can be attached to an SSL structure via the | ||
181 | SSL_set_app_data(SSL *ssl,char *data) call. | ||
182 | |||
183 | -------------------------- | ||
184 | The X509 library. | ||
185 | |||
186 | int X509_cert_verify(CERTIFICATE_CTX *ctx,X509 *xs, int (*cb)(), | ||
187 | int *error,char *arg,STACK *cert_chain); | ||
188 | int verify_callback(int ok,X509 *xs,X509 *xi,int depth,int error,char *arg, | ||
189 | STACK *cert_chain); | ||
190 | |||
191 | X509_cert_verify() is used to authenticate X509 certificates. The 'ctx' holds | ||
192 | the details of the various caches and files used to locate certificates. | ||
193 | 'xs' is the certificate to verify and 'cb' is the application callback (more | ||
194 | detail later). 'error' will be set to the error code and 'arg' is passed | ||
195 | to the 'cb' callback. Look at the VERIFY_* defines in crypto/x509/x509.h | ||
196 | |||
197 | When ever X509_cert_verify() makes a 'negative' decision about a | ||
198 | certitificate, the callback is called. If everything checks out, the | ||
199 | callback is called with 'VERIFY_OK' or 'VERIFY_ROOT_OK' (for a self | ||
200 | signed cert that is not the passed certificate). | ||
201 | |||
202 | The callback is passed the X509_cert_verify opinion of the certificate | ||
203 | in 'ok', the certificate in 'xs', the issuer certificate in 'xi', | ||
204 | the 'depth' of the certificate in the verification 'chain', the | ||
205 | VERIFY_* code in 'error' and the argument passed to X509_cert_verify() | ||
206 | in 'arg'. cert_chain is a list of extra certs to use if they are not | ||
207 | in the cache. | ||
208 | |||
209 | The callback can be used to look at the error reason, and then return 0 | ||
210 | for an 'error' or '1' for ok. This will override the X509_cert_verify() | ||
211 | opinion of the certificates validity. Processing will continue depending on | ||
212 | the return value. If one just wishes to use the callback for informational | ||
213 | reason, just return the 'ok' parameter. | ||
214 | |||
215 | -------------------------- | ||
216 | The BN and DH library. | ||
217 | |||
218 | BIGNUM *BN_generate_prime(int bits,int strong,BIGNUM *add, | ||
219 | BIGNUM *rem,void (*callback)(int,int)); | ||
220 | int BN_is_prime(BIGNUM *p,int nchecks,void (*callback)(int,int), | ||
221 | |||
222 | Read doc/bn.doc for the description of these 2. | ||
223 | |||
224 | DH *DH_generate_parameters(int prime_len,int generator, | ||
225 | void (*callback)(int,int)); | ||
226 | Read doc/bn.doc for the description of the callback, since it is just passed | ||
227 | to BN_generate_prime(), except that it is also called as | ||
228 | callback(3,0) by this function. | ||
229 | |||
230 | -------------------------- | ||
231 | The CRYPTO library. | ||
232 | |||
233 | void CRYPTO_set_locking_callback(void (*func)(int mode,int type,char *file, | ||
234 | int line)); | ||
235 | void CRYPTO_set_add_lock_callback(int (*func)(int *num,int mount, | ||
236 | int type,char *file, int line)); | ||
237 | void CRYPTO_set_id_callback(unsigned long (*func)(void)); | ||
238 | |||
239 | Read threads.doc for info on these ones. | ||
240 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d49ba78c5c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@ | |||
1 | The Cipher subroutines. | ||
2 | |||
3 | These routines require "evp.h" to be included. | ||
4 | |||
5 | These functions are a higher level interface to the various cipher | ||
6 | routines found in this library. As such, they allow the same code to be | ||
7 | used to encrypt and decrypt via different ciphers with only a change | ||
8 | in an initial parameter. These routines also provide buffering for block | ||
9 | ciphers. | ||
10 | |||
11 | These routines all take a pointer to the following structure to specify | ||
12 | which cipher to use. If you wish to use a new cipher with these routines, | ||
13 | you would probably be best off looking an how an existing cipher is | ||
14 | implemented and copying it. At this point in time, I'm not going to go | ||
15 | into many details. This structure should be considered opaque | ||
16 | |||
17 | typedef struct pem_cipher_st | ||
18 | { | ||
19 | int type; | ||
20 | int block_size; | ||
21 | int key_len; | ||
22 | int iv_len; | ||
23 | void (*enc_init)(); /* init for encryption */ | ||
24 | void (*dec_init)(); /* init for decryption */ | ||
25 | void (*do_cipher)(); /* encrypt data */ | ||
26 | } EVP_CIPHER; | ||
27 | |||
28 | The type field is the object NID of the cipher type | ||
29 | (read the section on Objects for an explanation of what a NID is). | ||
30 | The cipher block_size is how many bytes need to be passed | ||
31 | to the cipher at a time. Key_len is the | ||
32 | length of the key the cipher requires and iv_len is the length of the | ||
33 | initialisation vector required. enc_init is the function | ||
34 | called to initialise the ciphers context for encryption and dec_init is the | ||
35 | function to initialise for decryption (they need to be different, especially | ||
36 | for the IDEA cipher). | ||
37 | |||
38 | One reason for specifying the Cipher via a pointer to a structure | ||
39 | is that if you only use des-cbc, only the des-cbc routines will | ||
40 | be included when you link the program. If you passed an integer | ||
41 | that specified which cipher to use, the routine that mapped that | ||
42 | integer to a set of cipher functions would cause all the ciphers | ||
43 | to be link into the code. This setup also allows new ciphers | ||
44 | to be added by the application (with some restrictions). | ||
45 | |||
46 | The thirteen ciphers currently defined in this library are | ||
47 | |||
48 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ecb(); /* DES in ecb mode, iv=0, block=8, key= 8 */ | ||
49 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede(); /* DES in ecb ede mode, iv=0, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
50 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede3(); /* DES in ecb ede mode, iv=0, block=8, key=24 */ | ||
51 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_cfb(); /* DES in cfb mode, iv=8, block=1, key= 8 */ | ||
52 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede_cfb(); /* DES in ede cfb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
53 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede3_cfb();/* DES in ede cfb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=24 */ | ||
54 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ofb(); /* DES in ofb mode, iv=8, block=1, key= 8 */ | ||
55 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede_ofb(); /* DES in ede ofb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
56 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede3_ofb();/* DES in ede ofb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=24 */ | ||
57 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_cbc(); /* DES in cbc mode, iv=8, block=8, key= 8 */ | ||
58 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede_cbc(); /* DES in cbc ede mode, iv=8, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
59 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_des_ede3_cbc();/* DES in cbc ede mode, iv=8, block=8, key=24 */ | ||
60 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_desx_cbc(); /* DES in desx cbc mode,iv=8, block=8, key=24 */ | ||
61 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_rc4(); /* RC4, iv=0, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
62 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_idea_ecb(); /* IDEA in ecb mode, iv=0, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
63 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_idea_cfb(); /* IDEA in cfb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
64 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_idea_ofb(); /* IDEA in ofb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
65 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_idea_cbc(); /* IDEA in cbc mode, iv=8, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
66 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_rc2_ecb(); /* RC2 in ecb mode, iv=0, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
67 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_rc2_cfb(); /* RC2 in cfb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
68 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_rc2_ofb(); /* RC2 in ofb mode, iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
69 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_rc2_cbc(); /* RC2 in cbc mode, iv=8, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
70 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_bf_ecb(); /* Blowfish in ecb mode,iv=0, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
71 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_bf_cfb(); /* Blowfish in cfb mode,iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
72 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_bf_ofb(); /* Blowfish in ofb mode,iv=8, block=1, key=16 */ | ||
73 | EVP_CIPHER *EVP_bf_cbc(); /* Blowfish in cbc mode,iv=8, block=8, key=16 */ | ||
74 | |||
75 | The meaning of the compound names is as follows. | ||
76 | des The base cipher is DES. | ||
77 | idea The base cipher is IDEA | ||
78 | rc4 The base cipher is RC4-128 | ||
79 | rc2 The base cipher is RC2-128 | ||
80 | ecb Electronic Code Book form of the cipher. | ||
81 | cbc Cipher Block Chaining form of the cipher. | ||
82 | cfb 64 bit Cipher Feedback form of the cipher. | ||
83 | ofb 64 bit Output Feedback form of the cipher. | ||
84 | ede The cipher is used in Encrypt, Decrypt, Encrypt mode. The first | ||
85 | and last keys are the same. | ||
86 | ede3 The cipher is used in Encrypt, Decrypt, Encrypt mode. | ||
87 | |||
88 | All the Cipher routines take a EVP_CIPHER_CTX pointer as an argument. | ||
89 | The state of the cipher is kept in this structure. | ||
90 | |||
91 | typedef struct EVP_CIPHER_Ctx_st | ||
92 | { | ||
93 | EVP_CIPHER *cipher; | ||
94 | int encrypt; /* encrypt or decrypt */ | ||
95 | int buf_len; /* number we have left */ | ||
96 | unsigned char buf[8]; | ||
97 | union { | ||
98 | .... /* cipher specific stuff */ | ||
99 | } c; | ||
100 | } EVP_CIPHER_CTX; | ||
101 | |||
102 | Cipher is a pointer the the EVP_CIPHER for the current context. The encrypt | ||
103 | flag indicates encryption or decryption. buf_len is the number of bytes | ||
104 | currently being held in buf. | ||
105 | The 'c' union holds the cipher specify context. | ||
106 | |||
107 | The following functions are to be used. | ||
108 | |||
109 | int EVP_read_pw_string( | ||
110 | char *buf, | ||
111 | int len, | ||
112 | char *prompt, | ||
113 | int verify, | ||
114 | This function is the same as des_read_pw_string() (des.doc). | ||
115 | |||
116 | void EVP_set_pw_prompt(char *prompt); | ||
117 | This function sets the 'default' prompt to use to use in | ||
118 | EVP_read_pw_string when the prompt parameter is NULL. If the | ||
119 | prompt parameter is NULL, this 'default prompt' feature is turned | ||
120 | off. Be warned, this is a global variable so weird things | ||
121 | will happen if it is used under Win16 and care must be taken | ||
122 | with a multi-threaded version of the library. | ||
123 | |||
124 | char *EVP_get_pw_prompt(); | ||
125 | This returns a pointer to the default prompt string. NULL | ||
126 | if it is not set. | ||
127 | |||
128 | int EVP_BytesToKey( | ||
129 | EVP_CIPHER *type, | ||
130 | EVP_MD *md, | ||
131 | unsigned char *salt, | ||
132 | unsigned char *data, | ||
133 | int datal, | ||
134 | int count, | ||
135 | unsigned char *key, | ||
136 | unsigned char *iv); | ||
137 | This function is used to generate a key and an initialisation vector | ||
138 | for a specified cipher from a key string and a salt. Type | ||
139 | specifies the cipher the 'key' is being generated for. Md is the | ||
140 | message digest algorithm to use to generate the key and iv. The salt | ||
141 | is an optional 8 byte object that is used to help seed the key | ||
142 | generator. | ||
143 | If the salt value is NULL, it is just not used. Datal is the | ||
144 | number of bytes to use from 'data' in the key generation. | ||
145 | This function returns the key size for the specified cipher, if | ||
146 | data is NULL, this value is returns and no other | ||
147 | computation is performed. Count is | ||
148 | the number of times to loop around the key generator. I would | ||
149 | suggest leaving it's value as 1. Key and iv are the structures to | ||
150 | place the returning iv and key in. If they are NULL, no value is | ||
151 | generated for that particular value. | ||
152 | The algorithm used is as follows | ||
153 | |||
154 | /* M[] is an array of message digests | ||
155 | * MD() is the message digest function */ | ||
156 | M[0]=MD(data . salt); | ||
157 | for (i=1; i<count; i++) M[0]=MD(M[0]); | ||
158 | |||
159 | i=1 | ||
160 | while (data still needed for key and iv) | ||
161 | { | ||
162 | M[i]=MD(M[i-1] . data . salt); | ||
163 | for (i=1; i<count; i++) M[i]=MD(M[i]); | ||
164 | i++; | ||
165 | } | ||
166 | |||
167 | If the salt is NULL, it is not used. | ||
168 | The digests are concatenated together. | ||
169 | M = M[0] . M[1] . M[2] ....... | ||
170 | |||
171 | For key= 8, iv=8 => key=M[0.. 8], iv=M[ 9 .. 16]. | ||
172 | For key=16, iv=0 => key=M[0..16]. | ||
173 | For key=16, iv=8 => key=M[0..16], iv=M[17 .. 24]. | ||
174 | For key=24, iv=8 => key=M[0..24], iv=M[25 .. 32]. | ||
175 | |||
176 | This routine will produce DES-CBC keys and iv that are compatible | ||
177 | with the PKCS-5 standard when md2 or md5 are used. If md5 is | ||
178 | used, the salt is NULL and count is 1, this routine will produce | ||
179 | the password to key mapping normally used with RC4. | ||
180 | I have attempted to logically extend the PKCS-5 standard to | ||
181 | generate keys and iv for ciphers that require more than 16 bytes, | ||
182 | if anyone knows what the correct standard is, please inform me. | ||
183 | When using sha or sha1, things are a bit different under this scheme, | ||
184 | since sha produces a 20 byte digest. So for ciphers requiring | ||
185 | 24 bits of data, 20 will come from the first MD and 4 will | ||
186 | come from the second. | ||
187 | |||
188 | I have considered having a separate function so this 'routine' | ||
189 | can be used without the requirement of passing a EVP_CIPHER *, | ||
190 | but I have decided to not bother. If you wish to use the | ||
191 | function without official EVP_CIPHER structures, just declare | ||
192 | a local one and set the key_len and iv_len fields to the | ||
193 | length you desire. | ||
194 | |||
195 | The following routines perform encryption and decryption 'by parts'. By | ||
196 | this I mean that there are groups of 3 routines. An Init function that is | ||
197 | used to specify a cipher and initialise data structures. An Update routine | ||
198 | that does encryption/decryption, one 'chunk' at a time. And finally a | ||
199 | 'Final' function that finishes the encryption/decryption process. | ||
200 | All these functions take a EVP_CIPHER pointer to specify which cipher to | ||
201 | encrypt/decrypt with. They also take a EVP_CIPHER_CTX object as an | ||
202 | argument. This structure is used to hold the state information associated | ||
203 | with the operation in progress. | ||
204 | |||
205 | void EVP_EncryptInit( | ||
206 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
207 | EVP_CIPHER *type, | ||
208 | unsigned char *key, | ||
209 | unsigned char *iv); | ||
210 | This function initialise a EVP_CIPHER_CTX for encryption using the | ||
211 | cipher passed in the 'type' field. The cipher is initialised to use | ||
212 | 'key' as the key and 'iv' for the initialisation vector (if one is | ||
213 | required). If the type, key or iv is NULL, the value currently in the | ||
214 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX is reused. So to perform several decrypt | ||
215 | using the same cipher, key and iv, initialise with the cipher, | ||
216 | key and iv the first time and then for subsequent calls, | ||
217 | reuse 'ctx' but pass NULL for type, key and iv. You must make sure | ||
218 | to pass a key that is large enough for a particular cipher. I | ||
219 | would suggest using the EVP_BytesToKey() function. | ||
220 | |||
221 | void EVP_EncryptUpdate( | ||
222 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
223 | unsigned char *out, | ||
224 | int *outl, | ||
225 | unsigned char *in, | ||
226 | int inl); | ||
227 | This function takes 'inl' bytes from 'in' and outputs bytes | ||
228 | encrypted by the cipher 'ctx' was initialised with into 'out'. The | ||
229 | number of bytes written to 'out' is put into outl. If a particular | ||
230 | cipher encrypts in blocks, less or more bytes than input may be | ||
231 | output. Currently the largest block size used by supported ciphers | ||
232 | is 8 bytes, so 'out' should have room for 'inl+7' bytes. Normally | ||
233 | EVP_EncryptInit() is called once, followed by lots and lots of | ||
234 | calls to EVP_EncryptUpdate, followed by a single EVP_EncryptFinal | ||
235 | call. | ||
236 | |||
237 | void EVP_EncryptFinal( | ||
238 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
239 | unsigned char *out, | ||
240 | int *outl); | ||
241 | Because quite a large number of ciphers are block ciphers, there is | ||
242 | often an incomplete block to write out at the end of the | ||
243 | encryption. EVP_EncryptFinal() performs processing on this last | ||
244 | block. The last block in encoded in such a way that it is possible | ||
245 | to determine how many bytes in the last block are valid. For 8 byte | ||
246 | block size ciphers, if only 5 bytes in the last block are valid, the | ||
247 | last three bytes will be filled with the value 3. If only 2 were | ||
248 | valid, the other 6 would be filled with sixes. If all 8 bytes are | ||
249 | valid, a extra 8 bytes are appended to the cipher stream containing | ||
250 | nothing but 8 eights. These last bytes are output into 'out' and | ||
251 | the number of bytes written is put into 'outl' These last bytes | ||
252 | are output into 'out' and the number of bytes written is put into | ||
253 | 'outl'. This form of block cipher finalisation is compatible with | ||
254 | PKCS-5. Please remember that even if you are using ciphers like | ||
255 | RC4 that has no blocking and so the function will not write | ||
256 | anything into 'out', it would still be a good idea to pass a | ||
257 | variable for 'out' that can hold 8 bytes just in case the cipher is | ||
258 | changed some time in the future. It should also be remembered | ||
259 | that the EVP_CIPHER_CTX contains the password and so when one has | ||
260 | finished encryption with a particular EVP_CIPHER_CTX, it is good | ||
261 | practice to zero the structure | ||
262 | (ie. memset(ctx,0,sizeof(EVP_CIPHER_CTX)). | ||
263 | |||
264 | void EVP_DecryptInit( | ||
265 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
266 | EVP_CIPHER *type, | ||
267 | unsigned char *key, | ||
268 | unsigned char *iv); | ||
269 | This function is basically the same as EVP_EncryptInit() accept that | ||
270 | is prepares the EVP_CIPHER_CTX for decryption. | ||
271 | |||
272 | void EVP_DecryptUpdate( | ||
273 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
274 | unsigned char *out, | ||
275 | int *outl, | ||
276 | unsigned char *in, | ||
277 | int inl); | ||
278 | This function is basically the same as EVP_EncryptUpdate() | ||
279 | except that it performs decryption. There is one | ||
280 | fundamental difference though. 'out' can not be the same as | ||
281 | 'in' for any ciphers with a block size greater than 1 if more | ||
282 | than one call to EVP_DecryptUpdate() will be made. This | ||
283 | is because this routine can hold a 'partial' block between | ||
284 | calls. When a partial block is decrypted (due to more bytes | ||
285 | being passed via this function, they will be written to 'out' | ||
286 | overwriting the input bytes in 'in' that have not been read | ||
287 | yet. From this it should also be noted that 'out' should | ||
288 | be at least one 'block size' larger than 'inl'. This problem | ||
289 | only occurs on the second and subsequent call to | ||
290 | EVP_DecryptUpdate() when using a block cipher. | ||
291 | |||
292 | int EVP_DecryptFinal( | ||
293 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
294 | unsigned char *out, | ||
295 | int *outl); | ||
296 | This function is different to EVP_EncryptFinal in that it 'removes' | ||
297 | any padding bytes appended when the data was encrypted. Due to the | ||
298 | way in which 1 to 8 bytes may have been appended when encryption | ||
299 | using a block cipher, 'out' can end up with 0 to 7 bytes being put | ||
300 | into it. When decoding the padding bytes, it is possible to detect | ||
301 | an incorrect decryption. If the decryption appears to be wrong, 0 | ||
302 | is returned. If everything seems ok, 1 is returned. For ciphers | ||
303 | with a block size of 1 (RC4), this function would normally not | ||
304 | return any bytes and would always return 1. Just because this | ||
305 | function returns 1 does not mean the decryption was correct. It | ||
306 | would normally be wrong due to either the wrong key/iv or | ||
307 | corruption of the cipher data fed to EVP_DecryptUpdate(). | ||
308 | As for EVP_EncryptFinal, it is a good idea to zero the | ||
309 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX after use since the structure contains the key used | ||
310 | to decrypt the data. | ||
311 | |||
312 | The following Cipher routines are convenience routines that call either | ||
313 | EVP_EncryptXxx or EVP_DecryptXxx depending on weather the EVP_CIPHER_CTX | ||
314 | was setup to encrypt or decrypt. | ||
315 | |||
316 | void EVP_CipherInit( | ||
317 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
318 | EVP_CIPHER *type, | ||
319 | unsigned char *key, | ||
320 | unsigned char *iv, | ||
321 | int enc); | ||
322 | This function take arguments that are the same as EVP_EncryptInit() | ||
323 | and EVP_DecryptInit() except for the extra 'enc' flag. If 1, the | ||
324 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX is setup for encryption, if 0, decryption. | ||
325 | |||
326 | void EVP_CipherUpdate( | ||
327 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
328 | unsigned char *out, | ||
329 | int *outl, | ||
330 | unsigned char *in, | ||
331 | int inl); | ||
332 | Again this function calls either EVP_EncryptUpdate() or | ||
333 | EVP_DecryptUpdate() depending on state in the 'ctx' structure. | ||
334 | As noted for EVP_DecryptUpdate(), when this routine is used | ||
335 | for decryption with block ciphers, 'out' should not be the | ||
336 | same as 'in'. | ||
337 | |||
338 | int EVP_CipherFinal( | ||
339 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, | ||
340 | unsigned char *outm, | ||
341 | int *outl); | ||
342 | This routine call EVP_EncryptFinal() or EVP_DecryptFinal() | ||
343 | depending on the state information in 'ctx'. 1 is always returned | ||
344 | if the mode is encryption, otherwise the return value is the return | ||
345 | value of EVP_DecryptFinal(). | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.m b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.m new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f74917135 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/cipher.m | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ | |||
1 | From ssl-lists-owner@mincom.com Tue Oct 15 18:16:14 1996 | ||
2 | Received: from cygnus.mincom.oz.au by orb.mincom.oz.au with SMTP id AA11550 | ||
3 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for eay); Tue, 15 Oct 1996 08:17:41 +1000 | ||
4 | Received: (from daemon@localhost) by cygnus.mincom.oz.au (8.7.5/8.7.3) id IAA12472 for ssl-users-outgoing; Tue, 15 Oct 1996 08:16:35 +1000 (EST) | ||
5 | Received: from orb.mincom.oz.au (eay@orb.mincom.oz.au [192.55.197.1]) by cygnus.mincom.oz.au (8.7.5/8.7.3) with SMTP id IAA12463 for <ssl-users@listserv.mincom.oz.au>; Tue, 15 Oct 1996 08:16:32 +1000 (EST) | ||
6 | Received: by orb.mincom.oz.au id AA11544 | ||
7 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for ssl-users@listserv.mincom.oz.au); Tue, 15 Oct 1996 08:16:15 +1000 | ||
8 | Date: Tue, 15 Oct 1996 08:16:14 +1000 (EST) | ||
9 | From: Eric Young <eay@mincom.com> | ||
10 | X-Sender: eay@orb | ||
11 | To: Roland Haring <rharing@tandem.cl> | ||
12 | Cc: ssl-users@mincom.com | ||
13 | Subject: Re: Symmetric encryption with ssleay | ||
14 | In-Reply-To: <m0vBpyq-00001aC@tandemnet.tandem.cl> | ||
15 | Message-Id: <Pine.SOL.3.91.961015075623.11394A-100000@orb> | ||
16 | Mime-Version: 1.0 | ||
17 | Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=US-ASCII | ||
18 | Sender: ssl-lists-owner@mincom.com | ||
19 | Precedence: bulk | ||
20 | Status: RO | ||
21 | X-Status: | ||
22 | |||
23 | |||
24 | On Fri, 11 Oct 1996, Roland Haring wrote: | ||
25 | > THE_POINT: | ||
26 | > Would somebody be so kind to give me the minimum basic | ||
27 | > calls I need to do to libcrypto.a to get some text encrypted | ||
28 | > and decrypted again? ...hopefully with code included to do | ||
29 | > base64 encryption and decryption ... e.g. that sign-it.c code | ||
30 | > posted some while ago was a big help :-) (please, do not point | ||
31 | > me to apps/enc.c where I suspect my Heissenbug to be hidden :-) | ||
32 | |||
33 | Ok, the base64 encoding stuff in 'enc.c' does the wrong thing sometimes | ||
34 | when the data is less than a line long (this is for decoding). I'll dig | ||
35 | up the exact fix today and post it. I am taking longer on 0.6.5 than I | ||
36 | intended so I'll just post this patch. | ||
37 | |||
38 | The documentation to read is in | ||
39 | doc/cipher.doc, | ||
40 | doc/encode.doc (very sparse :-). | ||
41 | and perhaps | ||
42 | doc/digest.doc, | ||
43 | |||
44 | The basic calls to encrypt with say triple DES are | ||
45 | |||
46 | Given | ||
47 | char key[EVP_MAX_KEY_LENGTH]; | ||
48 | char iv[EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH]; | ||
49 | EVP_CIPHER_CTX ctx; | ||
50 | unsigned char out[512+8]; | ||
51 | int outl; | ||
52 | |||
53 | /* optional generation of key/iv data from text password using md5 | ||
54 | * via an upward compatable verson of PKCS#5. */ | ||
55 | EVP_BytesToKey(EVP_des_ede3_cbc,EVP_md5,NULL,passwd,strlen(passwd), | ||
56 | key,iv); | ||
57 | |||
58 | /* Initalise the EVP_CIPHER_CTX */ | ||
59 | EVP_EncryptInit(ctx,EVP_des_ede3_cbc,key,iv); | ||
60 | |||
61 | while (....) | ||
62 | { | ||
63 | /* This is processing 512 bytes at a time, the bytes are being | ||
64 | * copied into 'out', outl bytes are output. 'out' should not be the | ||
65 | * same as 'in' for reasons mentioned in the documentation. */ | ||
66 | EVP_EncryptUpdate(ctx,out,&outl,in,512); | ||
67 | } | ||
68 | |||
69 | /* Output the last 'block'. If the cipher is a block cipher, the last | ||
70 | * block is encoded in such a way so that a wrong decryption will normally be | ||
71 | * detected - again, one of the PKCS standards. */ | ||
72 | |||
73 | EVP_EncryptFinal(ctx,out,&outl); | ||
74 | |||
75 | To decrypt, use the EVP_DecryptXXXXX functions except that EVP_DecryptFinal() | ||
76 | will return 0 if the decryption fails (only detectable on block ciphers). | ||
77 | |||
78 | You can also use | ||
79 | EVP_CipherInit() | ||
80 | EVP_CipherUpdate() | ||
81 | EVP_CipherFinal() | ||
82 | which does either encryption or decryption depending on an extra | ||
83 | parameter to EVP_CipherInit(). | ||
84 | |||
85 | |||
86 | To do the base64 encoding, | ||
87 | EVP_EncodeInit() | ||
88 | EVP_EncodeUpdate() | ||
89 | EVP_EncodeFinal() | ||
90 | |||
91 | EVP_DecodeInit() | ||
92 | EVP_DecodeUpdate() | ||
93 | EVP_DecodeFinal() | ||
94 | |||
95 | where the encoding is quite simple, but the decoding can be a bit more | ||
96 | fun (due to dud input). | ||
97 | |||
98 | EVP_DecodeUpdate() returns -1 for an error on an input line, 0 if the | ||
99 | 'last line' was just processed, and 1 if more lines should be submitted. | ||
100 | |||
101 | EVP_DecodeFinal() returns -1 for an error or 1 if things are ok. | ||
102 | |||
103 | So the loop becomes | ||
104 | EVP_DecodeInit(....) | ||
105 | for (;;) | ||
106 | { | ||
107 | i=EVP_DecodeUpdate(....); | ||
108 | if (i < 0) goto err; | ||
109 | |||
110 | /* process the data */ | ||
111 | |||
112 | if (i == 0) break; | ||
113 | } | ||
114 | EVP_DecodeFinal(....); | ||
115 | /* process the data */ | ||
116 | |||
117 | The problem in 'enc.c' is that I was stuff the processing up after the | ||
118 | EVP_DecodeFinal(...) when the for(..) loop was not being run (one line of | ||
119 | base64 data) and this was because 'enc.c' tries to scan over a file until | ||
120 | it hits the first valid base64 encoded line. | ||
121 | |||
122 | hope this helps a bit. | ||
123 | eric | ||
124 | -- | ||
125 | Eric Young | BOOL is tri-state according to Bill Gates. | ||
126 | AARNet: eay@mincom.oz.au | RTFM Win32 GetMessage(). | ||
127 | |||
128 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/conf.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/conf.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f12fe884f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/conf.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ | |||
1 | The CONF library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | The CONF library is a simple set of routines that can be used to configure | ||
4 | programs. It is a superset of the genenv() function with some extra | ||
5 | structure. | ||
6 | |||
7 | The library consists of 5 functions. | ||
8 | |||
9 | LHASH *CONF_load(LHASH *config,char *file); | ||
10 | This function is called to load in a configuration file. Multiple | ||
11 | configuration files can be loaded, with each subsequent 'load' overwriting | ||
12 | any already defined 'variables'. If there is an error, NULL is returned. | ||
13 | If config is NULL, a new LHASH structure is created and returned, otherwise | ||
14 | the new data in the 'file' is loaded into the 'config' structure. | ||
15 | |||
16 | void CONF_free(LHASH *config); | ||
17 | This function free()s the data in config. | ||
18 | |||
19 | char *CONF_get_string(LHASH *config,char *section,char *name); | ||
20 | This function returns the string found in 'config' that corresponds to the | ||
21 | 'section' and 'name' specified. Classes and the naming system used will be | ||
22 | discussed later in this document. If the variable is not defined, an NULL | ||
23 | is returned. | ||
24 | |||
25 | long CONF_get_long(LHASH *config,char *section, char *name); | ||
26 | This function is the same as CONF_get_string() except that it converts the | ||
27 | string to an long and returns it. If variable is not a number or the | ||
28 | variable does not exist, 0 is returned. This is a little problematic but I | ||
29 | don't know of a simple way around it. | ||
30 | |||
31 | STACK *CONF_get_section(LHASH *config, char *section); | ||
32 | This function returns a 'stack' of CONF_VALUE items that are all the | ||
33 | items defined in a particular section. DO NOT free() any of the | ||
34 | variable returned. They will disappear when CONF_free() is called. | ||
35 | |||
36 | The 'lookup' model. | ||
37 | The configuration file is divided into 'sections'. Each section is started by | ||
38 | a line of the form '[ section ]'. All subsequent variable definitions are | ||
39 | of this section. A variable definition is a simple alpha-numeric name | ||
40 | followed by an '=' and then the data. A section or variable name can be | ||
41 | described by a regular expression of the following form '[A-Za-z0-9_]+'. | ||
42 | The value of the variable is the text after the '=' until the end of the | ||
43 | line, stripped of leading and trailing white space. | ||
44 | At this point I should mention that a '#' is a comment character, \ is the | ||
45 | escape character, and all three types of quote can be used to stop any | ||
46 | special interpretation of the data. | ||
47 | Now when the data is being loaded, variable expansion can occur. This is | ||
48 | done by expanding any $NAME sequences into the value represented by the | ||
49 | variable NAME. If the variable is not in the current section, the different | ||
50 | section can be specified by using the $SECTION::NAME form. The ${NAME} form | ||
51 | also works and is very useful for expanding variables inside strings. | ||
52 | |||
53 | When a variable is looked up, there are 2 special section. 'default', which | ||
54 | is the initial section, and 'ENV' which is the processes environment | ||
55 | variables (accessed via getenv()). When a variable is looked up, it is | ||
56 | first 'matched' with it's section (if one was specified), if this fails, the | ||
57 | 'default' section is matched. | ||
58 | If the 'lhash' variable passed was NULL, the environment is searched. | ||
59 | |||
60 | Now why do we bother with sections? So we can have multiple programs using | ||
61 | the same configuration file, or multiple instances of the same program | ||
62 | using different variables. It also provides a nice mechanism to override | ||
63 | the processes environment variables (eg ENV::HOME=/tmp). If there is a | ||
64 | program specific variable missing, we can have default values. | ||
65 | Multiple configuration files can be loaded, with each new value clearing | ||
66 | any predefined values. A system config file can provide 'default' values, | ||
67 | and application/usr specific files can provide overriding values. | ||
68 | |||
69 | Examples | ||
70 | |||
71 | # This is a simple example | ||
72 | SSLEAY_HOME = /usr/local/ssl | ||
73 | ENV::PATH = $SSLEAY_HOME/bin:$PATH # override my path | ||
74 | |||
75 | [X509] | ||
76 | cert_dir = $SSLEAY_HOME/certs # /usr/local/ssl/certs | ||
77 | |||
78 | [SSL] | ||
79 | CIPHER = DES-EDE-MD5:RC4-MD5 | ||
80 | USER_CERT = $HOME/${USER}di'r 5' # /home/eay/eaydir 5 | ||
81 | USER_CERT = $HOME/\${USER}di\'r # /home/eay/${USER}di'r | ||
82 | USER_CERT = "$HOME/${US"ER}di\'r # $HOME/${USER}di'r | ||
83 | |||
84 | TEST = 1234\ | ||
85 | 5678\ | ||
86 | 9ab # TEST=123456789ab | ||
87 | TTT = 1234\n\n # TTT=1234<nl><nl> | ||
88 | |||
89 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/des.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/des.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5879d968f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/des.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,505 @@ | |||
1 | The DES library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | Please note that this library was originally written to operate with | ||
4 | eBones, a version of Kerberos that had had encryption removed when it left | ||
5 | the USA and then put back in. As such there are some routines that I will | ||
6 | advise not using but they are still in the library for historical reasons. | ||
7 | For all calls that have an 'input' and 'output' variables, they can be the | ||
8 | same. | ||
9 | |||
10 | This library requires the inclusion of 'des.h'. | ||
11 | |||
12 | All of the encryption functions take what is called a des_key_schedule as an | ||
13 | argument. A des_key_schedule is an expanded form of the des key. | ||
14 | A des_key is 8 bytes of odd parity, the type used to hold the key is a | ||
15 | des_cblock. A des_cblock is an array of 8 bytes, often in this library | ||
16 | description I will refer to input bytes when the function specifies | ||
17 | des_cblock's as input or output, this just means that the variable should | ||
18 | be a multiple of 8 bytes. | ||
19 | |||
20 | The define DES_ENCRYPT is passed to specify encryption, DES_DECRYPT to | ||
21 | specify decryption. The functions and global variable are as follows: | ||
22 | |||
23 | int des_check_key; | ||
24 | DES keys are supposed to be odd parity. If this variable is set to | ||
25 | a non-zero value, des_set_key() will check that the key has odd | ||
26 | parity and is not one of the known weak DES keys. By default this | ||
27 | variable is turned off; | ||
28 | |||
29 | void des_set_odd_parity( | ||
30 | des_cblock *key ); | ||
31 | This function takes a DES key (8 bytes) and sets the parity to odd. | ||
32 | |||
33 | int des_is_weak_key( | ||
34 | des_cblock *key ); | ||
35 | This function returns a non-zero value if the DES key passed is a | ||
36 | weak, DES key. If it is a weak key, don't use it, try a different | ||
37 | one. If you are using 'random' keys, the chances of hitting a weak | ||
38 | key are 1/2^52 so it is probably not worth checking for them. | ||
39 | |||
40 | int des_set_key( | ||
41 | des_cblock *key, | ||
42 | des_key_schedule schedule); | ||
43 | Des_set_key converts an 8 byte DES key into a des_key_schedule. | ||
44 | A des_key_schedule is an expanded form of the key which is used to | ||
45 | perform actual encryption. It can be regenerated from the DES key | ||
46 | so it only needs to be kept when encryption or decryption is about | ||
47 | to occur. Don't save or pass around des_key_schedule's since they | ||
48 | are CPU architecture dependent, DES keys are not. If des_check_key | ||
49 | is non zero, zero is returned if the key has the wrong parity or | ||
50 | the key is a weak key, else 1 is returned. | ||
51 | |||
52 | int des_key_sched( | ||
53 | des_cblock *key, | ||
54 | des_key_schedule schedule); | ||
55 | An alternative name for des_set_key(). | ||
56 | |||
57 | int des_rw_mode; /* defaults to DES_PCBC_MODE */ | ||
58 | This flag holds either DES_CBC_MODE or DES_PCBC_MODE (default). | ||
59 | This specifies the function to use in the enc_read() and enc_write() | ||
60 | functions. | ||
61 | |||
62 | void des_encrypt( | ||
63 | unsigned long *data, | ||
64 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
65 | int enc); | ||
66 | This is the DES encryption function that gets called by just about | ||
67 | every other DES routine in the library. You should not use this | ||
68 | function except to implement 'modes' of DES. I say this because the | ||
69 | functions that call this routine do the conversion from 'char *' to | ||
70 | long, and this needs to be done to make sure 'non-aligned' memory | ||
71 | access do not occur. The characters are loaded 'little endian', | ||
72 | have a look at my source code for more details on how I use this | ||
73 | function. | ||
74 | Data is a pointer to 2 unsigned long's and ks is the | ||
75 | des_key_schedule to use. enc, is non zero specifies encryption, | ||
76 | zero if decryption. | ||
77 | |||
78 | void des_encrypt2( | ||
79 | unsigned long *data, | ||
80 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
81 | int enc); | ||
82 | This functions is the same as des_encrypt() except that the DES | ||
83 | initial permutation (IP) and final permutation (FP) have been left | ||
84 | out. As for des_encrypt(), you should not use this function. | ||
85 | It is used by the routines in my library that implement triple DES. | ||
86 | IP() des_encrypt2() des_encrypt2() des_encrypt2() FP() is the same | ||
87 | as des_encrypt() des_encrypt() des_encrypt() except faster :-). | ||
88 | |||
89 | void des_ecb_encrypt( | ||
90 | des_cblock *input, | ||
91 | des_cblock *output, | ||
92 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
93 | int enc); | ||
94 | This is the basic Electronic Code Book form of DES, the most basic | ||
95 | form. Input is encrypted into output using the key represented by | ||
96 | ks. If enc is non zero (DES_ENCRYPT), encryption occurs, otherwise | ||
97 | decryption occurs. Input is 8 bytes long and output is 8 bytes. | ||
98 | (the des_cblock structure is 8 chars). | ||
99 | |||
100 | void des_ecb3_encrypt( | ||
101 | des_cblock *input, | ||
102 | des_cblock *output, | ||
103 | des_key_schedule ks1, | ||
104 | des_key_schedule ks2, | ||
105 | des_key_schedule ks3, | ||
106 | int enc); | ||
107 | This is the 3 key EDE mode of ECB DES. What this means is that | ||
108 | the 8 bytes of input is encrypted with ks1, decrypted with ks2 and | ||
109 | then encrypted again with ks3, before being put into output; | ||
110 | C=E(ks3,D(ks2,E(ks1,M))). There is a macro, des_ecb2_encrypt() | ||
111 | that only takes 2 des_key_schedules that implements, | ||
112 | C=E(ks1,D(ks2,E(ks1,M))) in that the final encrypt is done with ks1. | ||
113 | |||
114 | void des_cbc_encrypt( | ||
115 | des_cblock *input, | ||
116 | des_cblock *output, | ||
117 | long length, | ||
118 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
119 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
120 | int enc); | ||
121 | This routine implements DES in Cipher Block Chaining mode. | ||
122 | Input, which should be a multiple of 8 bytes is encrypted | ||
123 | (or decrypted) to output which will also be a multiple of 8 bytes. | ||
124 | The number of bytes is in length (and from what I've said above, | ||
125 | should be a multiple of 8). If length is not a multiple of 8, I'm | ||
126 | not being held responsible :-). ivec is the initialisation vector. | ||
127 | This function does not modify this variable. To correctly implement | ||
128 | cbc mode, you need to do one of 2 things; copy the last 8 bytes of | ||
129 | cipher text for use as the next ivec in your application, | ||
130 | or use des_ncbc_encrypt(). | ||
131 | Only this routine has this problem with updating the ivec, all | ||
132 | other routines that are implementing cbc mode update ivec. | ||
133 | |||
134 | void des_ncbc_encrypt( | ||
135 | des_cblock *input, | ||
136 | des_cblock *output, | ||
137 | long length, | ||
138 | des_key_schedule sk, | ||
139 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
140 | int enc); | ||
141 | For historical reasons, des_cbc_encrypt() did not update the | ||
142 | ivec with the value requires so that subsequent calls to | ||
143 | des_cbc_encrypt() would 'chain'. This was needed so that the same | ||
144 | 'length' values would not need to be used when decrypting. | ||
145 | des_ncbc_encrypt() does the right thing. It is the same as | ||
146 | des_cbc_encrypt accept that ivec is updates with the correct value | ||
147 | to pass in subsequent calls to des_ncbc_encrypt(). I advise using | ||
148 | des_ncbc_encrypt() instead of des_cbc_encrypt(); | ||
149 | |||
150 | void des_xcbc_encrypt( | ||
151 | des_cblock *input, | ||
152 | des_cblock *output, | ||
153 | long length, | ||
154 | des_key_schedule sk, | ||
155 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
156 | des_cblock *inw, | ||
157 | des_cblock *outw, | ||
158 | int enc); | ||
159 | This is RSA's DESX mode of DES. It uses inw and outw to | ||
160 | 'whiten' the encryption. inw and outw are secret (unlike the iv) | ||
161 | and are as such, part of the key. So the key is sort of 24 bytes. | ||
162 | This is much better than cbc des. | ||
163 | |||
164 | void des_3cbc_encrypt( | ||
165 | des_cblock *input, | ||
166 | des_cblock *output, | ||
167 | long length, | ||
168 | des_key_schedule sk1, | ||
169 | des_key_schedule sk2, | ||
170 | des_cblock *ivec1, | ||
171 | des_cblock *ivec2, | ||
172 | int enc); | ||
173 | This function is flawed, do not use it. I have left it in the | ||
174 | library because it is used in my des(1) program and will function | ||
175 | correctly when used by des(1). If I removed the function, people | ||
176 | could end up unable to decrypt files. | ||
177 | This routine implements outer triple cbc encryption using 2 ks and | ||
178 | 2 ivec's. Use des_ede2_cbc_encrypt() instead. | ||
179 | |||
180 | void des_ede3_cbc_encrypt( | ||
181 | des_cblock *input, | ||
182 | des_cblock *output, | ||
183 | long length, | ||
184 | des_key_schedule ks1, | ||
185 | des_key_schedule ks2, | ||
186 | des_key_schedule ks3, | ||
187 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
188 | int enc); | ||
189 | This function implements outer triple CBC DES encryption with 3 | ||
190 | keys. What this means is that each 'DES' operation | ||
191 | inside the cbc mode is really an C=E(ks3,D(ks2,E(ks1,M))). | ||
192 | Again, this is cbc mode so an ivec is requires. | ||
193 | This mode is used by SSL. | ||
194 | There is also a des_ede2_cbc_encrypt() that only uses 2 | ||
195 | des_key_schedule's, the first being reused for the final | ||
196 | encryption. C=E(ks1,D(ks2,E(ks1,M))). This form of triple DES | ||
197 | is used by the RSAref library. | ||
198 | |||
199 | void des_pcbc_encrypt( | ||
200 | des_cblock *input, | ||
201 | des_cblock *output, | ||
202 | long length, | ||
203 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
204 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
205 | int enc); | ||
206 | This is Propagating Cipher Block Chaining mode of DES. It is used | ||
207 | by Kerberos v4. It's parameters are the same as des_ncbc_encrypt(). | ||
208 | |||
209 | void des_cfb_encrypt( | ||
210 | unsigned char *in, | ||
211 | unsigned char *out, | ||
212 | int numbits, | ||
213 | long length, | ||
214 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
215 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
216 | int enc); | ||
217 | Cipher Feedback Back mode of DES. This implementation 'feeds back' | ||
218 | in numbit blocks. The input (and output) is in multiples of numbits | ||
219 | bits. numbits should to be a multiple of 8 bits. Length is the | ||
220 | number of bytes input. If numbits is not a multiple of 8 bits, | ||
221 | the extra bits in the bytes will be considered padding. So if | ||
222 | numbits is 12, for each 2 input bytes, the 4 high bits of the | ||
223 | second byte will be ignored. So to encode 72 bits when using | ||
224 | a numbits of 12 take 12 bytes. To encode 72 bits when using | ||
225 | numbits of 9 will take 16 bytes. To encode 80 bits when using | ||
226 | numbits of 16 will take 10 bytes. etc, etc. This padding will | ||
227 | apply to both input and output. | ||
228 | |||
229 | |||
230 | void des_cfb64_encrypt( | ||
231 | unsigned char *in, | ||
232 | unsigned char *out, | ||
233 | long length, | ||
234 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
235 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
236 | int *num, | ||
237 | int enc); | ||
238 | This is one of the more useful functions in this DES library, it | ||
239 | implements CFB mode of DES with 64bit feedback. Why is this | ||
240 | useful you ask? Because this routine will allow you to encrypt an | ||
241 | arbitrary number of bytes, no 8 byte padding. Each call to this | ||
242 | routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec | ||
243 | and num. num contains 'how far' we are though ivec. If this does | ||
244 | not make much sense, read more about cfb mode of DES :-). | ||
245 | |||
246 | void des_ede3_cfb64_encrypt( | ||
247 | unsigned char *in, | ||
248 | unsigned char *out, | ||
249 | long length, | ||
250 | des_key_schedule ks1, | ||
251 | des_key_schedule ks2, | ||
252 | des_key_schedule ks3, | ||
253 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
254 | int *num, | ||
255 | int enc); | ||
256 | Same as des_cfb64_encrypt() accept that the DES operation is | ||
257 | triple DES. As usual, there is a macro for | ||
258 | des_ede2_cfb64_encrypt() which reuses ks1. | ||
259 | |||
260 | void des_ofb_encrypt( | ||
261 | unsigned char *in, | ||
262 | unsigned char *out, | ||
263 | int numbits, | ||
264 | long length, | ||
265 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
266 | des_cblock *ivec); | ||
267 | This is a implementation of Output Feed Back mode of DES. It is | ||
268 | the same as des_cfb_encrypt() in that numbits is the size of the | ||
269 | units dealt with during input and output (in bits). | ||
270 | |||
271 | void des_ofb64_encrypt( | ||
272 | unsigned char *in, | ||
273 | unsigned char *out, | ||
274 | long length, | ||
275 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
276 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
277 | int *num); | ||
278 | The same as des_cfb64_encrypt() except that it is Output Feed Back | ||
279 | mode. | ||
280 | |||
281 | void des_ede3_ofb64_encrypt( | ||
282 | unsigned char *in, | ||
283 | unsigned char *out, | ||
284 | long length, | ||
285 | des_key_schedule ks1, | ||
286 | des_key_schedule ks2, | ||
287 | des_key_schedule ks3, | ||
288 | des_cblock *ivec, | ||
289 | int *num); | ||
290 | Same as des_ofb64_encrypt() accept that the DES operation is | ||
291 | triple DES. As usual, there is a macro for | ||
292 | des_ede2_ofb64_encrypt() which reuses ks1. | ||
293 | |||
294 | int des_read_pw_string( | ||
295 | char *buf, | ||
296 | int length, | ||
297 | char *prompt, | ||
298 | int verify); | ||
299 | This routine is used to get a password from the terminal with echo | ||
300 | turned off. Buf is where the string will end up and length is the | ||
301 | size of buf. Prompt is a string presented to the 'user' and if | ||
302 | verify is set, the key is asked for twice and unless the 2 copies | ||
303 | match, an error is returned. A return code of -1 indicates a | ||
304 | system error, 1 failure due to use interaction, and 0 is success. | ||
305 | |||
306 | unsigned long des_cbc_cksum( | ||
307 | des_cblock *input, | ||
308 | des_cblock *output, | ||
309 | long length, | ||
310 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
311 | des_cblock *ivec); | ||
312 | This function produces an 8 byte checksum from input that it puts in | ||
313 | output and returns the last 4 bytes as a long. The checksum is | ||
314 | generated via cbc mode of DES in which only the last 8 byes are | ||
315 | kept. I would recommend not using this function but instead using | ||
316 | the EVP_Digest routines, or at least using MD5 or SHA. This | ||
317 | function is used by Kerberos v4 so that is why it stays in the | ||
318 | library. | ||
319 | |||
320 | char *des_fcrypt( | ||
321 | const char *buf, | ||
322 | const char *salt | ||
323 | char *ret); | ||
324 | This is my fast version of the unix crypt(3) function. This version | ||
325 | takes only a small amount of space relative to other fast | ||
326 | crypt() implementations. This is different to the normal crypt | ||
327 | in that the third parameter is the buffer that the return value | ||
328 | is written into. It needs to be at least 14 bytes long. This | ||
329 | function is thread safe, unlike the normal crypt. | ||
330 | |||
331 | char *crypt( | ||
332 | const char *buf, | ||
333 | const char *salt); | ||
334 | This function calls des_fcrypt() with a static array passed as the | ||
335 | third parameter. This emulates the normal non-thread safe semantics | ||
336 | of crypt(3). | ||
337 | |||
338 | void des_string_to_key( | ||
339 | char *str, | ||
340 | des_cblock *key); | ||
341 | This function takes str and converts it into a DES key. I would | ||
342 | recommend using MD5 instead and use the first 8 bytes of output. | ||
343 | When I wrote the first version of these routines back in 1990, MD5 | ||
344 | did not exist but I feel these routines are still sound. This | ||
345 | routines is compatible with the one in MIT's libdes. | ||
346 | |||
347 | void des_string_to_2keys( | ||
348 | char *str, | ||
349 | des_cblock *key1, | ||
350 | des_cblock *key2); | ||
351 | This function takes str and converts it into 2 DES keys. | ||
352 | I would recommend using MD5 and using the 16 bytes as the 2 keys. | ||
353 | I have nothing against these 2 'string_to_key' routines, it's just | ||
354 | that if you say that your encryption key is generated by using the | ||
355 | 16 bytes of an MD5 hash, every-one knows how you generated your | ||
356 | keys. | ||
357 | |||
358 | int des_read_password( | ||
359 | des_cblock *key, | ||
360 | char *prompt, | ||
361 | int verify); | ||
362 | This routine combines des_read_pw_string() with des_string_to_key(). | ||
363 | |||
364 | int des_read_2passwords( | ||
365 | des_cblock *key1, | ||
366 | des_cblock *key2, | ||
367 | char *prompt, | ||
368 | int verify); | ||
369 | This routine combines des_read_pw_string() with des_string_to_2key(). | ||
370 | |||
371 | void des_random_seed( | ||
372 | des_cblock key); | ||
373 | This routine sets a starting point for des_random_key(). | ||
374 | |||
375 | void des_random_key( | ||
376 | des_cblock ret); | ||
377 | This function return a random key. Make sure to 'seed' the random | ||
378 | number generator (with des_random_seed()) before using this function. | ||
379 | I personally now use a MD5 based random number system. | ||
380 | |||
381 | int des_enc_read( | ||
382 | int fd, | ||
383 | char *buf, | ||
384 | int len, | ||
385 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
386 | des_cblock *iv); | ||
387 | This function will write to a file descriptor the encrypted data | ||
388 | from buf. This data will be preceded by a 4 byte 'byte count' and | ||
389 | will be padded out to 8 bytes. The encryption is either CBC of | ||
390 | PCBC depending on the value of des_rw_mode. If it is DES_PCBC_MODE, | ||
391 | pcbc is used, if DES_CBC_MODE, cbc is used. The default is to use | ||
392 | DES_PCBC_MODE. | ||
393 | |||
394 | int des_enc_write( | ||
395 | int fd, | ||
396 | char *buf, | ||
397 | int len, | ||
398 | des_key_schedule ks, | ||
399 | des_cblock *iv); | ||
400 | This routines read stuff written by des_enc_read() and decrypts it. | ||
401 | I have used these routines quite a lot but I don't believe they are | ||
402 | suitable for non-blocking io. If you are after a full | ||
403 | authentication/encryption over networks, have a look at SSL instead. | ||
404 | |||
405 | unsigned long des_quad_cksum( | ||
406 | des_cblock *input, | ||
407 | des_cblock *output, | ||
408 | long length, | ||
409 | int out_count, | ||
410 | des_cblock *seed); | ||
411 | This is a function from Kerberos v4 that is not anything to do with | ||
412 | DES but was needed. It is a cksum that is quicker to generate than | ||
413 | des_cbc_cksum(); I personally would use MD5 routines now. | ||
414 | ===== | ||
415 | Modes of DES | ||
416 | Quite a bit of the following information has been taken from | ||
417 | AS 2805.5.2 | ||
418 | Australian Standard | ||
419 | Electronic funds transfer - Requirements for interfaces, | ||
420 | Part 5.2: Modes of operation for an n-bit block cipher algorithm | ||
421 | Appendix A | ||
422 | |||
423 | There are several different modes in which DES can be used, they are | ||
424 | as follows. | ||
425 | |||
426 | Electronic Codebook Mode (ECB) (des_ecb_encrypt()) | ||
427 | - 64 bits are enciphered at a time. | ||
428 | - The order of the blocks can be rearranged without detection. | ||
429 | - The same plaintext block always produces the same ciphertext block | ||
430 | (for the same key) making it vulnerable to a 'dictionary attack'. | ||
431 | - An error will only affect one ciphertext block. | ||
432 | |||
433 | Cipher Block Chaining Mode (CBC) (des_cbc_encrypt()) | ||
434 | - a multiple of 64 bits are enciphered at a time. | ||
435 | - The CBC mode produces the same ciphertext whenever the same | ||
436 | plaintext is encrypted using the same key and starting variable. | ||
437 | - The chaining operation makes the ciphertext blocks dependent on the | ||
438 | current and all preceding plaintext blocks and therefore blocks can not | ||
439 | be rearranged. | ||
440 | - The use of different starting variables prevents the same plaintext | ||
441 | enciphering to the same ciphertext. | ||
442 | - An error will affect the current and the following ciphertext blocks. | ||
443 | |||
444 | Cipher Feedback Mode (CFB) (des_cfb_encrypt()) | ||
445 | - a number of bits (j) <= 64 are enciphered at a time. | ||
446 | - The CFB mode produces the same ciphertext whenever the same | ||
447 | plaintext is encrypted using the same key and starting variable. | ||
448 | - The chaining operation makes the ciphertext variables dependent on the | ||
449 | current and all preceding variables and therefore j-bit variables are | ||
450 | chained together and can not be rearranged. | ||
451 | - The use of different starting variables prevents the same plaintext | ||
452 | enciphering to the same ciphertext. | ||
453 | - The strength of the CFB mode depends on the size of k (maximal if | ||
454 | j == k). In my implementation this is always the case. | ||
455 | - Selection of a small value for j will require more cycles through | ||
456 | the encipherment algorithm per unit of plaintext and thus cause | ||
457 | greater processing overheads. | ||
458 | - Only multiples of j bits can be enciphered. | ||
459 | - An error will affect the current and the following ciphertext variables. | ||
460 | |||
461 | Output Feedback Mode (OFB) (des_ofb_encrypt()) | ||
462 | - a number of bits (j) <= 64 are enciphered at a time. | ||
463 | - The OFB mode produces the same ciphertext whenever the same | ||
464 | plaintext enciphered using the same key and starting variable. More | ||
465 | over, in the OFB mode the same key stream is produced when the same | ||
466 | key and start variable are used. Consequently, for security reasons | ||
467 | a specific start variable should be used only once for a given key. | ||
468 | - The absence of chaining makes the OFB more vulnerable to specific attacks. | ||
469 | - The use of different start variables values prevents the same | ||
470 | plaintext enciphering to the same ciphertext, by producing different | ||
471 | key streams. | ||
472 | - Selection of a small value for j will require more cycles through | ||
473 | the encipherment algorithm per unit of plaintext and thus cause | ||
474 | greater processing overheads. | ||
475 | - Only multiples of j bits can be enciphered. | ||
476 | - OFB mode of operation does not extend ciphertext errors in the | ||
477 | resultant plaintext output. Every bit error in the ciphertext causes | ||
478 | only one bit to be in error in the deciphered plaintext. | ||
479 | - OFB mode is not self-synchronising. If the two operation of | ||
480 | encipherment and decipherment get out of synchronism, the system needs | ||
481 | to be re-initialised. | ||
482 | - Each re-initialisation should use a value of the start variable | ||
483 | different from the start variable values used before with the same | ||
484 | key. The reason for this is that an identical bit stream would be | ||
485 | produced each time from the same parameters. This would be | ||
486 | susceptible to a ' known plaintext' attack. | ||
487 | |||
488 | Triple ECB Mode (des_ecb3_encrypt()) | ||
489 | - Encrypt with key1, decrypt with key2 and encrypt with key3 again. | ||
490 | - As for ECB encryption but increases the key length to 168 bits. | ||
491 | There are theoretic attacks that can be used that make the effective | ||
492 | key length 112 bits, but this attack also requires 2^56 blocks of | ||
493 | memory, not very likely, even for the NSA. | ||
494 | - If both keys are the same it is equivalent to encrypting once with | ||
495 | just one key. | ||
496 | - If the first and last key are the same, the key length is 112 bits. | ||
497 | There are attacks that could reduce the key space to 55 bit's but it | ||
498 | requires 2^56 blocks of memory. | ||
499 | - If all 3 keys are the same, this is effectively the same as normal | ||
500 | ecb mode. | ||
501 | |||
502 | Triple CBC Mode (des_ede3_cbc_encrypt()) | ||
503 | - Encrypt with key1, decrypt with key2 and then encrypt with key3. | ||
504 | - As for CBC encryption but increases the key length to 168 bits with | ||
505 | the same restrictions as for triple ecb mode. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/digest.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/digest.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d2fb987591 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/digest.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ | |||
1 | |||
2 | The Message Digest subroutines. | ||
3 | |||
4 | These routines require "evp.h" to be included. | ||
5 | |||
6 | These functions are a higher level interface to the various message digest | ||
7 | routines found in this library. As such, they allow the same code to be | ||
8 | used to digest via different algorithms with only a change in an initial | ||
9 | parameter. They are basically just a front-end to the MD2, MD5, SHA | ||
10 | and SHA1 | ||
11 | routines. | ||
12 | |||
13 | These routines all take a pointer to the following structure to specify | ||
14 | which message digest algorithm to use. | ||
15 | typedef struct evp_md_st | ||
16 | { | ||
17 | int type; | ||
18 | int pkey_type; | ||
19 | int md_size; | ||
20 | void (*init)(); | ||
21 | void (*update)(); | ||
22 | void (*final)(); | ||
23 | |||
24 | int required_pkey_type; /*EVP_PKEY_xxx */ | ||
25 | int (*sign)(); | ||
26 | int (*verify)(); | ||
27 | } EVP_MD; | ||
28 | |||
29 | If additional message digest algorithms are to be supported, a structure of | ||
30 | this type needs to be declared and populated and then the Digest routines | ||
31 | can be used with that algorithm. The type field is the object NID of the | ||
32 | digest type (read the section on Objects for an explanation). The pkey_type | ||
33 | is the Object type to use when the a message digest is generated by there | ||
34 | routines and then is to be signed with the pkey algorithm. Md_size is | ||
35 | the size of the message digest returned. Init, update | ||
36 | and final are the relevant functions to perform the message digest function | ||
37 | by parts. One reason for specifying the message digest to use via this | ||
38 | mechanism is that if you only use md5, only the md5 routines will | ||
39 | be included in you linked program. If you passed an integer | ||
40 | that specified which message digest to use, the routine that mapped that | ||
41 | integer to a set of message digest functions would cause all the message | ||
42 | digests functions to be link into the code. This setup also allows new | ||
43 | message digest functions to be added by the application. | ||
44 | |||
45 | The six message digests defined in this library are | ||
46 | |||
47 | EVP_MD *EVP_md2(void); /* RSA sign/verify */ | ||
48 | EVP_MD *EVP_md5(void); /* RSA sign/verify */ | ||
49 | EVP_MD *EVP_sha(void); /* RSA sign/verify */ | ||
50 | EVP_MD *EVP_sha1(void); /* RSA sign/verify */ | ||
51 | EVP_MD *EVP_dss(void); /* DSA sign/verify */ | ||
52 | EVP_MD *EVP_dss1(void); /* DSA sign/verify */ | ||
53 | |||
54 | All the message digest routines take a EVP_MD_CTX pointer as an argument. | ||
55 | The state of the message digest is kept in this structure. | ||
56 | |||
57 | typedef struct pem_md_ctx_st | ||
58 | { | ||
59 | EVP_MD *digest; | ||
60 | union { | ||
61 | unsigned char base[4]; /* this is used in my library as a | ||
62 | * 'pointer' to all union elements | ||
63 | * structures. */ | ||
64 | MD2_CTX md2; | ||
65 | MD5_CTX md5; | ||
66 | SHA_CTX sha; | ||
67 | } md; | ||
68 | } EVP_MD_CTX; | ||
69 | |||
70 | The Digest functions are as follows. | ||
71 | |||
72 | void EVP_DigestInit( | ||
73 | EVP_MD_CTX *ctx, | ||
74 | EVP_MD *type); | ||
75 | This function is used to initialise the EVP_MD_CTX. The message | ||
76 | digest that will associated with 'ctx' is specified by 'type'. | ||
77 | |||
78 | void EVP_DigestUpdate( | ||
79 | EVP_MD_CTX *ctx, | ||
80 | unsigned char *data, | ||
81 | unsigned int cnt); | ||
82 | This function is used to pass more data to the message digest | ||
83 | function. 'cnt' bytes are digested from 'data'. | ||
84 | |||
85 | void EVP_DigestFinal( | ||
86 | EVP_MD_CTX *ctx, | ||
87 | unsigned char *md, | ||
88 | unsigned int *len); | ||
89 | This function finishes the digestion and puts the message digest | ||
90 | into 'md'. The length of the message digest is put into len; | ||
91 | EVP_MAX_MD_SIZE is the size of the largest message digest that | ||
92 | can be returned from this function. Len can be NULL if the | ||
93 | size of the digest is not required. | ||
94 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/encode.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/encode.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af17549289 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/encode.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ | |||
1 | |||
2 | void EVP_EncodeInit(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx); | ||
3 | void EVP_EncodeUpdate(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx,unsigned char *out, | ||
4 | int *outl,unsigned char *in,int inl); | ||
5 | void EVP_EncodeFinal(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx,unsigned char *out,int *outl); | ||
6 | int EVP_EncodeBlock(unsigned char *t, unsigned char *f, int n); | ||
7 | |||
8 | void EVP_DecodeInit(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx); | ||
9 | int EVP_DecodeUpdate(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx,unsigned char *out,int *outl, | ||
10 | unsigned char *in, int inl); | ||
11 | int EVP_DecodeFinal(EVP_ENCODE_CTX *ctx, unsigned | ||
12 | char *out, int *outl); | ||
13 | int EVP_DecodeBlock(unsigned char *t, unsigned | ||
14 | char *f, int n); | ||
15 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/envelope.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/envelope.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..483e4fca6b --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/envelope.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ | |||
1 | The following routines are use to create 'digital' envelopes. | ||
2 | By this I mean that they perform various 'higher' level cryptographic | ||
3 | functions. Have a read of 'cipher.doc' and 'digest.doc' since those | ||
4 | routines are used by these functions. | ||
5 | cipher.doc contains documentation about the cipher part of the | ||
6 | envelope library and digest.doc contatins the description of the | ||
7 | message digests supported. | ||
8 | |||
9 | To 'sign' a document involves generating a message digest and then encrypting | ||
10 | the digest with an private key. | ||
11 | |||
12 | #define EVP_SignInit(a,b) EVP_DigestInit(a,b) | ||
13 | #define EVP_SignUpdate(a,b,c) EVP_DigestUpdate(a,b,c) | ||
14 | Due to the fact this operation is basically just an extended message | ||
15 | digest, the first 2 functions are macro calls to Digest generating | ||
16 | functions. | ||
17 | |||
18 | int EVP_SignFinal( | ||
19 | EVP_MD_CTX *ctx, | ||
20 | unsigned char *md, | ||
21 | unsigned int *s, | ||
22 | EVP_PKEY *pkey); | ||
23 | This finalisation function finishes the generation of the message | ||
24 | digest and then encrypts the digest (with the correct message digest | ||
25 | object identifier) with the EVP_PKEY private key. 'ctx' is the message digest | ||
26 | context. 'md' will end up containing the encrypted message digest. This | ||
27 | array needs to be EVP_PKEY_size(pkey) bytes long. 's' will actually | ||
28 | contain the exact length. 'pkey' of course is the private key. It is | ||
29 | one of EVP_PKEY_RSA or EVP_PKEY_DSA type. | ||
30 | If there is an error, 0 is returned, otherwise 1. | ||
31 | |||
32 | Verify is used to check an signed message digest. | ||
33 | |||
34 | #define EVP_VerifyInit(a,b) EVP_DigestInit(a,b) | ||
35 | #define EVP_VerifyUpdate(a,b,c) EVP_DigestUpdate(a,b,c) | ||
36 | Since the first step is to generate a message digest, the first 2 functions | ||
37 | are macros. | ||
38 | |||
39 | int EVP_VerifyFinal( | ||
40 | EVP_MD_CTX *ctx, | ||
41 | unsigned char *md, | ||
42 | unsigned int s, | ||
43 | EVP_PKEY *pkey); | ||
44 | This function finishes the generation of the message digest and then | ||
45 | compares it with the supplied encrypted message digest. 'md' contains the | ||
46 | 's' bytes of encrypted message digest. 'pkey' is used to public key decrypt | ||
47 | the digest. It is then compared with the message digest just generated. | ||
48 | If they match, 1 is returned else 0. | ||
49 | |||
50 | int EVP_SealInit(EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, EVP_CIPHER *type, unsigned char **ek, | ||
51 | int *ekl, unsigned char *iv, EVP_PKEY **pubk, int npubk); | ||
52 | Must have at least one public key, error is 0. I should also mention that | ||
53 | the buffers pointed to by 'ek' need to be EVP_PKEY_size(pubk[n]) is size. | ||
54 | |||
55 | #define EVP_SealUpdate(a,b,c,d,e) EVP_EncryptUpdate(a,b,c,d,e) | ||
56 | void EVP_SealFinal(EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx,unsigned char *out,int *outl); | ||
57 | |||
58 | |||
59 | int EVP_OpenInit(EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx,EVP_CIPHER *type,unsigned char *ek, | ||
60 | int ekl,unsigned char *iv,EVP_PKEY *priv); | ||
61 | 0 on failure | ||
62 | |||
63 | #define EVP_OpenUpdate(a,b,c,d,e) EVP_DecryptUpdate(a,b,c,d,e) | ||
64 | |||
65 | int EVP_OpenFinal(EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, unsigned char *out, int *outl); | ||
66 | Decrypt final return code | ||
67 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/error.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/error.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a91654999a --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/error.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ | |||
1 | The error routines. | ||
2 | |||
3 | The 'error' system I've implemented is intended to server 2 purpose, to | ||
4 | record the reason why a command failed and to record where in the libraries | ||
5 | the failure occurred. It is more or less setup to record a 'trace' of which | ||
6 | library components were being traversed when the error occurred. | ||
7 | |||
8 | When an error is recorded, it is done so a as single unsigned long which is | ||
9 | composed of three parts. The top byte is the 'library' number, the middle | ||
10 | 12 bytes is the function code, and the bottom 12 bits is the 'reason' code. | ||
11 | |||
12 | Each 'library', or should a say, 'section' of the SSLeay library has a | ||
13 | different unique 'library' error number. Each function in the library has | ||
14 | a number that is unique for that library. Each 'library' also has a number | ||
15 | for each 'error reason' that is only unique for that 'library'. | ||
16 | |||
17 | Due to the way these error routines record a 'error trace', there is an | ||
18 | array per thread that is used to store the error codes. | ||
19 | The various functions in this library are used to access | ||
20 | and manipulate this array. | ||
21 | |||
22 | void ERR_put_error(int lib, int func,int reason); | ||
23 | This routine records an error in library 'lib', function 'func' | ||
24 | and reason 'reason'. As errors get 'put' into the buffer, they wrap | ||
25 | around and overwrite old errors if too many are written. It is assumed | ||
26 | that the last errors are the most important. | ||
27 | |||
28 | unsigned long ERR_get_error(void ); | ||
29 | This function returns the last error added to the error buffer. | ||
30 | In effect it is popping the value off the buffer so repeated calls will | ||
31 | continue to return values until there are no more errors to return in which | ||
32 | case 0 is returned. | ||
33 | |||
34 | unsigned long ERR_peek_error(void ); | ||
35 | This function returns the value of the last error added to the | ||
36 | error buffer but does not 'pop' it from the buffer. | ||
37 | |||
38 | void ERR_clear_error(void ); | ||
39 | This function clears the error buffer, discarding all unread | ||
40 | errors. | ||
41 | |||
42 | While the above described error system obviously produces lots of different | ||
43 | error number, a method for 'reporting' these errors in a human readable | ||
44 | form is required. To achieve this, each library has the option of | ||
45 | 'registering' error strings. | ||
46 | |||
47 | typedef struct ERR_string_data_st | ||
48 | { | ||
49 | unsigned long error; | ||
50 | char *string; | ||
51 | } ERR_STRING_DATA; | ||
52 | |||
53 | The 'ERR_STRING_DATA' contains an error code and the corresponding text | ||
54 | string. To add new function error strings for a library, the | ||
55 | ERR_STRING_DATA needs to be 'registered' with the library. | ||
56 | |||
57 | void ERR_load_strings(unsigned long lib,ERR_STRING_DATA *err); | ||
58 | This function 'registers' the array of ERR_STRING_DATA pointed to by | ||
59 | 'err' as error text strings for the error library 'lib'. | ||
60 | |||
61 | void ERR_free_strings(void); | ||
62 | This function free()s all the loaded error strings. | ||
63 | |||
64 | char *ERR_error_string(unsigned long error,char *buf); | ||
65 | This function returns a text string that is a human readable | ||
66 | version of the error represented by 'error'. Buff should be at least 120 | ||
67 | bytes long and if it is NULL, the return value is a pointer to a static | ||
68 | variable that will contain the error string, otherwise 'buf' is returned. | ||
69 | If there is not a text string registered for a particular error, a text | ||
70 | string containing the error number is returned instead. | ||
71 | |||
72 | void ERR_print_errors(BIO *bp); | ||
73 | void ERR_print_errors_fp(FILE *fp); | ||
74 | This function is a convenience routine that prints the error string | ||
75 | for each error until all errors have been accounted for. | ||
76 | |||
77 | char *ERR_lib_error_string(unsigned long e); | ||
78 | char *ERR_func_error_string(unsigned long e); | ||
79 | char *ERR_reason_error_string(unsigned long e); | ||
80 | The above three functions return the 3 different components strings for the | ||
81 | error 'e'. ERR_error_string() uses these functions. | ||
82 | |||
83 | void ERR_load_ERR_strings(void ); | ||
84 | This function 'registers' the error strings for the 'ERR' module. | ||
85 | |||
86 | void ERR_load_crypto_strings(void ); | ||
87 | This function 'register' the error strings for just about every | ||
88 | library in the SSLeay package except for the SSL routines. There is no | ||
89 | need to ever register any error text strings and you will probably save in | ||
90 | program size. If on the other hand you do 'register' all errors, it is | ||
91 | quite easy to determine why a particular routine failed. | ||
92 | |||
93 | As a final footnote as to why the error system is designed as it is. | ||
94 | 1) I did not want a single 'global' error code. | ||
95 | 2) I wanted to know which subroutine a failure occurred in. | ||
96 | 3) For Windows NT etc, it should be simple to replace the 'key' routines | ||
97 | with code to pass error codes back to the application. | ||
98 | 4) I wanted the option of meaningful error text strings. | ||
99 | |||
100 | Late breaking news - the changes to support threads. | ||
101 | |||
102 | Each 'thread' has an 'ERR_STATE' state associated with it. | ||
103 | ERR_STATE *ERR_get_state(void ) will return the 'state' for the calling | ||
104 | thread/process. | ||
105 | |||
106 | ERR_remove_state(unsigned long pid); will 'free()' this state. If pid == 0 | ||
107 | the current 'thread/process' will have it's error state removed. | ||
108 | If you do not remove the error state of a thread, this could be considered a | ||
109 | form of memory leak, so just after 'reaping' a thread that has died, | ||
110 | call ERR_remove_state(pid). | ||
111 | |||
112 | Have a read of thread.doc for more details for what is required for | ||
113 | multi-threading support. All the other error routines will | ||
114 | work correctly when using threads. | ||
115 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/legal.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/legal.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b55ed5ce6a --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/legal.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ | |||
1 | From eay@mincom.com Thu Jun 27 00:25:45 1996 | ||
2 | Received: by orb.mincom.oz.au id AA15821 | ||
3 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for eay); Wed, 26 Jun 1996 14:25:45 +1000 | ||
4 | Date: Wed, 26 Jun 1996 14:25:45 +1000 (EST) | ||
5 | From: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au> | ||
6 | X-Sender: eay@orb | ||
7 | To: Ken Toll <ktoll@ren.digitalage.com> | ||
8 | Cc: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au>, ssl-talk@netscape.com | ||
9 | Subject: Re: Unidentified subject! | ||
10 | In-Reply-To: <9606261950.ZM28943@ren.digitalage.com> | ||
11 | Message-Id: <Pine.SOL.3.91.960626131156.28573K-100000@orb> | ||
12 | Mime-Version: 1.0 | ||
13 | Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=US-ASCII | ||
14 | Status: O | ||
15 | X-Status: | ||
16 | |||
17 | |||
18 | This is a little off topic but since SSLeay is a free implementation of | ||
19 | the SSLv2 protocol, I feel it is worth responding on the topic of if it | ||
20 | is actually legal for Americans to use free cryptographic software. | ||
21 | |||
22 | On Wed, 26 Jun 1996, Ken Toll wrote: | ||
23 | > Is the U.S the only country that SSLeay cannot be used commercially | ||
24 | > (because of RSAref) or is that going to be an issue with every country | ||
25 | > that a client/server application (non-web browser/server) is deployed | ||
26 | > and sold? | ||
27 | |||
28 | >From what I understand, the software patents that apply to algorithms | ||
29 | like RSA and DH only apply in the USA. The IDEA algorithm I believe is | ||
30 | patened in europe (USA?), but considing how little it is used by other SSL | ||
31 | implementations, it quite easily be left out of the SSLeay build | ||
32 | (this can be done with a compile flag). | ||
33 | |||
34 | Actually if the RSA patent did apply outside the USA, it could be rather | ||
35 | interesting since RSA is not alowed to let RSA toolkits outside of the USA | ||
36 | [1], and since these are the only forms that they will alow the algorithm | ||
37 | to be used in, it would mean that non-one outside of the USA could produce | ||
38 | public key software which would be a very strong statment for | ||
39 | international patent law to make :-). This logic is a little flawed but | ||
40 | it still points out some of the more interesting permutations of USA | ||
41 | patent law and ITAR restrictions. | ||
42 | |||
43 | Inside the USA there is also the unresolved issue of RC4/RC2 which were | ||
44 | made public on sci.crypt in Sep 1994 (RC4) and Feb 1996 (RC2). I have | ||
45 | copies of the origional postings if people are interested. RSA I believe | ||
46 | claim that they were 'trade-secrets' and that some-one broke an NDA in | ||
47 | revealing them. Other claim they reverse engineered the algorithms from | ||
48 | compiled binaries. If the algorithms were reverse engineered, I belive | ||
49 | RSA had no legal leg to stand on. If an NDA was broken, I don't know. | ||
50 | Regardless, RSA, I belive, is willing to go to court over the issue so | ||
51 | licencing is probably the best idea, or at least talk to them. | ||
52 | If there are people who actually know more about this, pease let me know, I | ||
53 | don't want to vilify or spread miss-information if I can help it. | ||
54 | |||
55 | If you are not producing a web browser, it is easy to build SSLeay with | ||
56 | RC2/RC4 removed. Since RC4 is the defacto standard cipher in | ||
57 | all web software (and it is damn fast) it is more or less required for | ||
58 | www use. For non www use of SSL, especially for an application where | ||
59 | interoperability with other vendors is not critical just leave it out. | ||
60 | |||
61 | Removing IDEA, RC2 and RC4 would only leave DES and Triple DES but | ||
62 | they should be ok. Considing that Triple DES can encrypt at rates of | ||
63 | 410k/sec on a pentium 100, and 940k/sec on a P6/200, this is quite | ||
64 | reasonable performance. Single DES clocks in at 1160k/s and 2467k/s | ||
65 | respectivly is actually quite fast for those not so paranoid (56 bit key).[1] | ||
66 | |||
67 | > Is it possible to get a certificate for commercial use outside of the U.S.? | ||
68 | yes. | ||
69 | |||
70 | Thawte Consulting issues certificates (they are the people who sell the | ||
71 | Sioux httpd server and are based in South Africa) | ||
72 | Verisign will issue certificates for Sioux (sold from South Africa), so this | ||
73 | proves that they will issue certificate for OS use if they are | ||
74 | happy with the quality of the software. | ||
75 | |||
76 | (The above mentioned companies just the ones that I know for sure are issuing | ||
77 | certificates outside the USA). | ||
78 | |||
79 | There is always the point that if you are using SSL for an intra net, | ||
80 | SSLeay provides programs that can be used so you can issue your own | ||
81 | certificates. They need polishing but at least it is a good starting point. | ||
82 | |||
83 | I am not doing anything outside Australian law by implementing these | ||
84 | algorithms (to the best of my knowedge). It is another example of how | ||
85 | the world legal system does not cope with the internet very well. | ||
86 | |||
87 | I may start making shared libraries available (I have now got DLL's for | ||
88 | Windows). This will mean that distributions into the usa could be | ||
89 | shipped with a version with a reduced cipher set and the versions outside | ||
90 | could use the DLL/shared library with all the ciphers (and without RSAref). | ||
91 | |||
92 | This could be completly hidden from the application, so this would not | ||
93 | even require a re-linking. | ||
94 | |||
95 | This is the reverse of what people were talking about doing to get around | ||
96 | USA export regulations :-) | ||
97 | |||
98 | eric | ||
99 | |||
100 | [1]: The RSAref2.0 tookit is available on at least 3 ftp sites in Europe | ||
101 | and one in South Africa. | ||
102 | |||
103 | [2]: Since I always get questions when I post benchmark numbers :-), | ||
104 | DES performace figures are in 1000's of bytes per second in cbc | ||
105 | mode using an 8192 byte buffer. The pentium 100 was running Windows NT | ||
106 | 3.51 DLLs and the 686/200 was running NextStep. | ||
107 | I quote pentium 100 benchmarks because it is basically the | ||
108 | 'entry level' computer that most people buy for personal use. | ||
109 | Windows 95 is the OS shipping on those boxes, so I'll give | ||
110 | NT numbers (the same Win32 runtime environment). The 686 | ||
111 | numbers are present as an indication of where we will be in a | ||
112 | few years. | ||
113 | -- | ||
114 | Eric Young | BOOL is tri-state according to Bill Gates. | ||
115 | AARNet: eay@mincom.oz.au | RTFM Win32 GetMessage(). | ||
116 | |||
117 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/lhash.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/lhash.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5a2aeb4b38 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/lhash.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ | |||
1 | The LHASH library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | I wrote this library in 1991 and have since forgotten why I called it lhash. | ||
4 | It implements a hash table from an article I read at the | ||
5 | time from 'Communications of the ACM'. What makes this hash | ||
6 | table different is that as the table fills, the hash table is | ||
7 | increased (or decreased) in size via realloc(). | ||
8 | When a 'resize' is done, instead of all hashes being redistributed over | ||
9 | twice as many 'buckets', one bucket is split. So when an 'expand' is done, | ||
10 | there is only a minimal cost to redistribute some values. Subsequent | ||
11 | inserts will cause more single 'bucket' redistributions but there will | ||
12 | never be a sudden large cost due to redistributing all the 'buckets'. | ||
13 | |||
14 | The state for a particular hash table is kept in the LHASH structure. | ||
15 | The LHASH structure also records statistics about most aspects of accessing | ||
16 | the hash table. This is mostly a legacy of my writing this library for | ||
17 | the reasons of implementing what looked like a nice algorithm rather than | ||
18 | for a particular software product. | ||
19 | |||
20 | Internal stuff you probably don't want to know about. | ||
21 | The decision to increase or decrease the hash table size is made depending | ||
22 | on the 'load' of the hash table. The load is the number of items in the | ||
23 | hash table divided by the size of the hash table. The default values are | ||
24 | as follows. If (hash->up_load < load) => expand. | ||
25 | if (hash->down_load > load) => contract. The 'up_load' has a default value of | ||
26 | 1 and 'down_load' has a default value of 2. These numbers can be modified | ||
27 | by the application by just playing with the 'up_load' and 'down_load' | ||
28 | variables. The 'load' is kept in a form which is multiplied by 256. So | ||
29 | hash->up_load=8*256; will cause a load of 8 to be set. | ||
30 | |||
31 | If you are interested in performance the field to watch is | ||
32 | num_comp_calls. The hash library keeps track of the 'hash' value for | ||
33 | each item so when a lookup is done, the 'hashes' are compared, if | ||
34 | there is a match, then a full compare is done, and | ||
35 | hash->num_comp_calls is incremented. If num_comp_calls is not equal | ||
36 | to num_delete plus num_retrieve it means that your hash function is | ||
37 | generating hashes that are the same for different values. It is | ||
38 | probably worth changing your hash function if this is the case because | ||
39 | even if your hash table has 10 items in a 'bucked', it can be searched | ||
40 | with 10 'unsigned long' compares and 10 linked list traverses. This | ||
41 | will be much less expensive that 10 calls to you compare function. | ||
42 | |||
43 | LHASH *lh_new( | ||
44 | unsigned long (*hash)(), | ||
45 | int (*cmp)()); | ||
46 | This function is used to create a new LHASH structure. It is passed | ||
47 | function pointers that are used to store and retrieve values passed | ||
48 | into the hash table. The 'hash' | ||
49 | function is a hashing function that will return a hashed value of | ||
50 | it's passed structure. 'cmp' is passed 2 parameters, it returns 0 | ||
51 | is they are equal, otherwise, non zero. | ||
52 | If there are any problems (usually malloc failures), NULL is | ||
53 | returned, otherwise a new LHASH structure is returned. The | ||
54 | hash value is normally truncated to a power of 2, so make sure | ||
55 | that your hash function returns well mixed low order bits. | ||
56 | |||
57 | void lh_free( | ||
58 | LHASH *lh); | ||
59 | This function free()s a LHASH structure. If there is malloced | ||
60 | data in the hash table, it will not be freed. Consider using the | ||
61 | lh_doall function to deallocate any remaining entries in the hash | ||
62 | table. | ||
63 | |||
64 | char *lh_insert( | ||
65 | LHASH *lh, | ||
66 | char *data); | ||
67 | This function inserts the data pointed to by data into the lh hash | ||
68 | table. If there is already and entry in the hash table entry, the | ||
69 | value being replaced is returned. A NULL is returned if the new | ||
70 | entry does not clash with an entry already in the table (the normal | ||
71 | case) or on a malloc() failure (perhaps I should change this....). | ||
72 | The 'char *data' is exactly what is passed to the hash and | ||
73 | comparison functions specified in lh_new(). | ||
74 | |||
75 | char *lh_delete( | ||
76 | LHASH *lh, | ||
77 | char *data); | ||
78 | This routine deletes an entry from the hash table. The value being | ||
79 | deleted is returned. NULL is returned if there is no such value in | ||
80 | the hash table. | ||
81 | |||
82 | char *lh_retrieve( | ||
83 | LHASH *lh, | ||
84 | char *data); | ||
85 | If 'data' is in the hash table it is returned, else NULL is | ||
86 | returned. The way these routines would normally be uses is that a | ||
87 | dummy structure would have key fields populated and then | ||
88 | ret=lh_retrieve(hash,&dummy);. Ret would now be a pointer to a fully | ||
89 | populated structure. | ||
90 | |||
91 | void lh_doall( | ||
92 | LHASH *lh, | ||
93 | void (*func)(char *a)); | ||
94 | This function will, for every entry in the hash table, call function | ||
95 | 'func' with the data item as parameters. | ||
96 | This function can be quite useful when used as follows. | ||
97 | void cleanup(STUFF *a) | ||
98 | { STUFF_free(a); } | ||
99 | lh_doall(hash,cleanup); | ||
100 | lh_free(hash); | ||
101 | This can be used to free all the entries, lh_free() then | ||
102 | cleans up the 'buckets' that point to nothing. Be careful | ||
103 | when doing this. If you delete entries from the hash table, | ||
104 | in the call back function, the table may decrease in size, | ||
105 | moving item that you are | ||
106 | currently on down lower in the hash table. This could cause | ||
107 | some entries to be skipped. The best solution to this problem | ||
108 | is to set lh->down_load=0 before you start. This will stop | ||
109 | the hash table ever being decreased in size. | ||
110 | |||
111 | void lh_doall_arg( | ||
112 | LHASH *lh; | ||
113 | void(*func)(char *a,char *arg)); | ||
114 | char *arg; | ||
115 | This function is the same as lh_doall except that the function | ||
116 | called will be passed 'arg' as the second argument. | ||
117 | |||
118 | unsigned long lh_strhash( | ||
119 | char *c); | ||
120 | This function is a demo string hashing function. Since the LHASH | ||
121 | routines would normally be passed structures, this routine would | ||
122 | not normally be passed to lh_new(), rather it would be used in the | ||
123 | function passed to lh_new(). | ||
124 | |||
125 | The next three routines print out various statistics about the state of the | ||
126 | passed hash table. These numbers are all kept in the lhash structure. | ||
127 | |||
128 | void lh_stats( | ||
129 | LHASH *lh, | ||
130 | FILE *out); | ||
131 | This function prints out statistics on the size of the hash table, | ||
132 | how many entries are in it, and the number and result of calls to | ||
133 | the routines in this library. | ||
134 | |||
135 | void lh_node_stats( | ||
136 | LHASH *lh, | ||
137 | FILE *out); | ||
138 | For each 'bucket' in the hash table, the number of entries is | ||
139 | printed. | ||
140 | |||
141 | void lh_node_usage_stats( | ||
142 | LHASH *lh, | ||
143 | FILE *out); | ||
144 | This function prints out a short summary of the state of the hash | ||
145 | table. It prints what I call the 'load' and the 'actual load'. | ||
146 | The load is the average number of data items per 'bucket' in the | ||
147 | hash table. The 'actual load' is the average number of items per | ||
148 | 'bucket', but only for buckets which contain entries. So the | ||
149 | 'actual load' is the average number of searches that will need to | ||
150 | find an item in the hash table, while the 'load' is the average number | ||
151 | that will be done to record a miss. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md2.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md2.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b106bc675d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md2.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ | |||
1 | The MD2 library. | ||
2 | MD2 is a message digest algorithm that can be used to condense an arbitrary | ||
3 | length message down to a 16 byte hash. The functions all need to be passed | ||
4 | a MD2_CTX which is used to hold the MD2 context during multiple MD2_Update() | ||
5 | function calls. The normal method of use for this library is as follows | ||
6 | |||
7 | MD2_Init(...); | ||
8 | MD2_Update(...); | ||
9 | ... | ||
10 | MD2_Update(...); | ||
11 | MD2_Final(...); | ||
12 | |||
13 | This library requires the inclusion of 'md2.h'. | ||
14 | |||
15 | The main negative about MD2 is that it is slow, especially when compared | ||
16 | to MD5. | ||
17 | |||
18 | The functions are as follows: | ||
19 | |||
20 | void MD2_Init( | ||
21 | MD2_CTX *c); | ||
22 | This function needs to be called to initiate a MD2_CTX structure for | ||
23 | use. | ||
24 | |||
25 | void MD2_Update( | ||
26 | MD2_CTX *c; | ||
27 | unsigned char *data; | ||
28 | unsigned long len); | ||
29 | This updates the message digest context being generated with 'len' | ||
30 | bytes from the 'data' pointer. The number of bytes can be any | ||
31 | length. | ||
32 | |||
33 | void MD2_Final( | ||
34 | unsigned char *md; | ||
35 | MD2_CTX *c; | ||
36 | This function is called when a message digest of the data digested | ||
37 | with MD2_Update() is wanted. The message digest is put in the 'md' | ||
38 | array and is MD2_DIGEST_LENGTH (16) bytes long. | ||
39 | |||
40 | unsigned char *MD2( | ||
41 | unsigned long n; | ||
42 | unsigned char *d; | ||
43 | unsigned char *md; | ||
44 | This function performs a MD2_Init(), followed by a MD2_Update() | ||
45 | followed by a MD2_Final() (using a local MD2_CTX). | ||
46 | The resulting digest is put into 'md' if it is not NULL. | ||
47 | Regardless of the value of 'md', the message | ||
48 | digest is returned from the function. If 'md' was NULL, the message | ||
49 | digest returned is being stored in a static structure. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md5.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md5.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..519dbdc61a --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/md5.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ | |||
1 | The MD5 library. | ||
2 | MD5 is a message digest algorithm that can be used to condense an arbitrary | ||
3 | length message down to a 16 byte hash. The functions all need to be passed | ||
4 | a MD5_CTX which is used to hold the MD5 context during multiple MD5_Update() | ||
5 | function calls. This library also contains random number routines that are | ||
6 | based on MD5 | ||
7 | |||
8 | The normal method of use for this library is as follows | ||
9 | |||
10 | MD5_Init(...); | ||
11 | MD5_Update(...); | ||
12 | ... | ||
13 | MD5_Update(...); | ||
14 | MD5_Final(...); | ||
15 | |||
16 | This library requires the inclusion of 'md5.h'. | ||
17 | |||
18 | The functions are as follows: | ||
19 | |||
20 | void MD5_Init( | ||
21 | MD5_CTX *c); | ||
22 | This function needs to be called to initiate a MD5_CTX structure for | ||
23 | use. | ||
24 | |||
25 | void MD5_Update( | ||
26 | MD5_CTX *c; | ||
27 | unsigned char *data; | ||
28 | unsigned long len); | ||
29 | This updates the message digest context being generated with 'len' | ||
30 | bytes from the 'data' pointer. The number of bytes can be any | ||
31 | length. | ||
32 | |||
33 | void MD5_Final( | ||
34 | unsigned char *md; | ||
35 | MD5_CTX *c; | ||
36 | This function is called when a message digest of the data digested | ||
37 | with MD5_Update() is wanted. The message digest is put in the 'md' | ||
38 | array and is MD5_DIGEST_LENGTH (16) bytes long. | ||
39 | |||
40 | unsigned char *MD5( | ||
41 | unsigned char *d; | ||
42 | unsigned long n; | ||
43 | unsigned char *md; | ||
44 | This function performs a MD5_Init(), followed by a MD5_Update() | ||
45 | followed by a MD5_Final() (using a local MD5_CTX). | ||
46 | The resulting digest is put into 'md' if it is not NULL. | ||
47 | Regardless of the value of 'md', the message | ||
48 | digest is returned from the function. If 'md' was NULL, the message | ||
49 | digest returned is being stored in a static structure. | ||
50 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/memory.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/memory.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9aa33ace0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/memory.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ | |||
1 | In the interests of debugging SSLeay, there is an option to compile | ||
2 | using some simple memory leak checking. | ||
3 | |||
4 | All malloc(), free() and realloc() calls in SSLeay now go via | ||
5 | Malloc(), Free() and Realloc() (except those in crypto/lhash). | ||
6 | |||
7 | If CRYPTO_MDEBUG is defined, these calls are #defined to | ||
8 | CRYPTO_malloc(), CRYPTO_free() and CRYPTO_realloc(). | ||
9 | If it is not defined, they are #defined to malloc(), free() and realloc(). | ||
10 | |||
11 | the CRYPTO_malloc() routines by default just call the underlying library | ||
12 | functons. | ||
13 | |||
14 | If CRYPTO_mem_ctrl(CRYPTO_MEM_CHECK_ON) is called, memory leak detection is | ||
15 | turned on. CRYPTO_mem_ctrl(CRYPTO_MEM_CHECK_OFF) turns it off. | ||
16 | |||
17 | When turned on, each Malloc() or Realloc() call is recored along with the file | ||
18 | and line number from where the call was made. (This is done using the | ||
19 | lhash library which always uses normal system malloc(3) routines). | ||
20 | |||
21 | void CRYPTO_mem_leaks(BIO *b); | ||
22 | void CRYPTO_mem_leaks_fp(FILE *fp); | ||
23 | These both print out the list of memory that has not been free()ed. | ||
24 | This will probably be rather hard to read, but if you look for the 'top level' | ||
25 | structure allocation, this will often give an idea as to what is not being | ||
26 | free()ed. I don't expect people to use this stuff normally. | ||
27 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ms3-ca.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ms3-ca.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f8350aadc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ms3-ca.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@ | |||
1 | Date: Mon, 9 Jun 97 08:00:33 +0200 | ||
2 | From: Holger.Reif@PrakInf.TU-Ilmenau.DE (Holger Reif) | ||
3 | Subject: ms3-ca.doc | ||
4 | Organization: TU Ilmenau, Fak. IA, FG Telematik | ||
5 | Content-Length: 14575 | ||
6 | Status: RO | ||
7 | X-Status: | ||
8 | |||
9 | Loading client certs into MSIE 3.01 | ||
10 | =================================== | ||
11 | |||
12 | This document conatains all the information necessary to succesfully set up | ||
13 | some scripts to issue client certs to Microsoft Internet Explorer. It | ||
14 | includes the required knowledge about the model MSIE uses for client | ||
15 | certification and includes complete sample scripts ready to play with. The | ||
16 | scripts were tested against a modified ca program of SSLeay 0.6.6 and should | ||
17 | work with the regular ca program that comes with version 0.8.0. I haven't | ||
18 | tested against MSIE 4.0 | ||
19 | |||
20 | You can use the information contained in this document in either way you | ||
21 | want. However if you feel it saved you a lot of time I ask you to be as fair | ||
22 | as to mention my name: Holger Reif <reif@prakinf.tu-ilmenau.de>. | ||
23 | |||
24 | 1.) The model used by MSIE | ||
25 | -------------------------- | ||
26 | |||
27 | The Internet Explorer doesn't come with a embedded engine for installing | ||
28 | client certs like Netscape's Navigator. It rather uses the CryptoAPI (CAPI) | ||
29 | defined by Microsoft. CAPI comes with WindowsNT 4.0 or is installed together | ||
30 | with Internet Explorer since 3.01. The advantage of this approach is a higher | ||
31 | flexibility because the certificates in the (per user) system open | ||
32 | certificate store may be used by other applications as well. The drawback | ||
33 | however is that you need to do a bit more work to get a client cert issued. | ||
34 | |||
35 | CAPI defines functions which will handle basic cryptographic work, eg. | ||
36 | generating keys, encrypting some data, signing text or building a certificate | ||
37 | request. The procedure is as follows: A CAPI function generates you a key | ||
38 | pair and saves it into the certificate store. After that one builds a | ||
39 | Distinguished Name. Together with that key pair another CAPI function forms a | ||
40 | PKCS#10 request which you somehow need to submit to a CA. Finally the issued | ||
41 | cert is given to a yet another CAPI function which saves it into the | ||
42 | certificate store. | ||
43 | |||
44 | The certificate store with the user's keys and certs is in the registry. You | ||
45 | will find it under HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Cryptography/ (I | ||
46 | leave it to you as a little exercise to figure out what all the entries mean | ||
47 | ;-). Note that the keys are protected only with the user's usual Windows | ||
48 | login password. | ||
49 | |||
50 | 2.) The practical usage | ||
51 | ----------------------- | ||
52 | |||
53 | Unfortunatly since CAPI is a system API you can't access its functions from | ||
54 | HTML code directly. For this purpose Microsoft provides a wrapper called | ||
55 | certenr3.dll. This DLL accesses the CAPI functions and provides an interface | ||
56 | usable from Visual Basic Script. One needs to install that library on the | ||
57 | computer which wants to have client cert. The easiest way is to load it as an | ||
58 | ActiveX control (certenr3.dll is properly authenticode signed by MS ;-). If | ||
59 | you have ever enrolled e cert request at a CA you will have installed it. | ||
60 | |||
61 | At time of writing certenr3.dll is contained in | ||
62 | http://www.microsoft.com/workshop/prog/security/csa/certenr3.exe. It comes | ||
63 | with an README file which explains the available functions. It is labeled | ||
64 | beta but every CA seems to use it anyway. The license.txt allows you the | ||
65 | usage for your own purposes (as far as I understood) and a somehow limited | ||
66 | distribution. | ||
67 | |||
68 | The two functions of main interest are GenerateKeyPair and AcceptCredentials. | ||
69 | For complete explanation of all possible parameters see the README file. Here | ||
70 | are only minimal required parameters and their values. | ||
71 | |||
72 | GenerateKeyPair(sessionID, FASLE, szName, 0, "ClientAuth", TRUE, FALSE, 1) | ||
73 | - sessionID is a (locally to that computer) unique string to correlate the | ||
74 | generated key pair with a cert installed later. | ||
75 | - szName is the DN of the form "C=DE; S=Thueringen; L=Ilmenau; CN=Holger | ||
76 | Reif; 1.2.840.113549.1.9.1=reif@prakinf.tu-ilmenau.de". Note that S is the | ||
77 | abreviation for StateOrProvince. The recognized abreviation include CN, O, C, | ||
78 | OU, G, I, L, S, T. If the abreviation is unknown (eg. for PKCS#9 email addr) | ||
79 | you need to use the full object identifier. The starting point for searching | ||
80 | them could be crypto/objects.h since all OIDs know to SSLeay are listed | ||
81 | there. | ||
82 | - note: the possible ninth parameter which should give a default name to the | ||
83 | certificate storage location doesn't seem to work. Changes to the constant | ||
84 | values in the call above doesn't seem to make sense. You can't generate | ||
85 | PKCS#10 extensions with that function. | ||
86 | |||
87 | The result of GenerateKeyPair is the base64 encoded PKCS#10 request. However | ||
88 | it has a little strange format that SSLeay doesn't accept. (BTW I feel the | ||
89 | decision of rejecting that format as standard conforming.) It looks like | ||
90 | follows: | ||
91 | 1st line with 76 chars | ||
92 | 2nd line with 76 chars | ||
93 | ... | ||
94 | (n-2)th line with 76 chars | ||
95 | (n-1)th line contains a multiple of 4 chars less then 76 (possible | ||
96 | empty) | ||
97 | (n)th line has zero or 4 chars (then with 1 or 2 equal signs - the | ||
98 | original text's lenght wasn'T a multiple of 3) | ||
99 | The line separator has two chars: 0x0d 0x0a | ||
100 | |||
101 | AcceptCredentials(sessionID, credentials, 0, FALSE) | ||
102 | - sessionID needs to be the same as while generating the key pair | ||
103 | - credentials is the base64 encoded PKCS#7 object containing the cert. | ||
104 | |||
105 | CRL's and CA certs are not required simply just the client cert. (It seems to | ||
106 | me that both are not even checked somehow.) The only format of the base64 | ||
107 | encoded object I succesfully used was all characters in a very long string | ||
108 | without line feeds or carriage returns. (Hey, it doesn't matter, only a | ||
109 | computer reads it!) | ||
110 | |||
111 | The result should be S_OK. For error handling see the example that comes with | ||
112 | certenr3.dll. | ||
113 | |||
114 | A note about ASN.1 character encodings. certenr3.dll seems to know only about | ||
115 | 2 of them: UniversalString and PrintableString. First it is definitely wrong | ||
116 | for an email address which is IA5STRING (checked by ssleay's ca). Second | ||
117 | unfortunately MSIE (at least until version 3.02) can't handle UniversalString | ||
118 | correctly - they just blow up you cert store! Therefore ssleay's ca (starting | ||
119 | from version 0.8.0) tries to convert the encodings automatically to IA5STRING | ||
120 | or TeletexString. The beef is it will work only for the latin-1 (western) | ||
121 | charset. Microsoft still has to do abit of homework... | ||
122 | |||
123 | 3.) An example | ||
124 | -------------- | ||
125 | |||
126 | At least you need two steps: generating the key & request and then installing | ||
127 | the certificate. A real world CA would have some more steps involved, eg. | ||
128 | accepting some license. Note that both scripts shown below are just | ||
129 | experimental state without any warrenty! | ||
130 | |||
131 | First how to generate a request. Note that we can't use a static page because | ||
132 | of the sessionID. I generate it from system time plus pid and hope it is | ||
133 | unique enough. Your are free to feed it through md5 to get more impressive | ||
134 | ID's ;-) Then the intended text is read in with sed which inserts the | ||
135 | sessionID. | ||
136 | |||
137 | -----BEGIN ms-enroll.cgi----- | ||
138 | #!/bin/sh | ||
139 | SESSION_ID=`date '+%y%m%d%H%M%S'`$$ | ||
140 | echo Content-type: text/html | ||
141 | echo | ||
142 | sed s/template_for_sessId/$SESSION_ID/ <<EOF | ||
143 | <HTML><HEAD> | ||
144 | <TITLE>Certificate Enrollment Test Page</TITLE> | ||
145 | </HEAD><BODY> | ||
146 | |||
147 | <OBJECT | ||
148 | classid="clsid:33BEC9E0-F78F-11cf-B782-00C04FD7BF43" | ||
149 | codebase=certenr3.dll | ||
150 | id=certHelper | ||
151 | > | ||
152 | </OBJECT> | ||
153 | |||
154 | <CENTER> | ||
155 | <H2>enrollment for a personal cert</H2> | ||
156 | <BR><HR WIDTH=50%><BR><P> | ||
157 | <FORM NAME="MSIE_Enrollment" ACTION="ms-gencert.cgi" ENCTYPE=x-www-form- | ||
158 | encoded METHOD=POST> | ||
159 | <TABLE> | ||
160 | <TR><TD>Country</TD><TD><INPUT NAME="Country" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
161 | <TR><TD>State</TD><TD><INPUT NAME="StateOrProvince" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
162 | <TR><TD>Location</TD><TD><INPUT NAME="Location" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
163 | <TR><TD>Organization</TD><TD><INPUT NAME="Organization" | ||
164 | VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
165 | <TR><TD>Organizational Unit</TD> | ||
166 | <TD><INPUT NAME="OrganizationalUnit" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
167 | <TR><TD>Name</TD><TD><INPUT NAME="CommonName" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
168 | <TR><TD>eMail Address</TD> | ||
169 | <TD><INPUT NAME="EmailAddress" VALUE=""></TD></TR> | ||
170 | <TR><TD></TD> | ||
171 | <TD><INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" NAME="submit" VALUE="Beantragen"></TD></TR> | ||
172 | </TABLE> | ||
173 | <INPUT TYPE="hidden" NAME="SessionId" VALUE="template_for_sessId"> | ||
174 | <INPUT TYPE="hidden" NAME="Request" VALUE=""> | ||
175 | </FORM> | ||
176 | <BR><HR WIDTH=50%><BR><P> | ||
177 | </CENTER> | ||
178 | |||
179 | <SCRIPT LANGUAGE=VBS> | ||
180 | Dim DN | ||
181 | |||
182 | Sub Submit_OnClick | ||
183 | Dim TheForm | ||
184 | Set TheForm = Document.MSIE_Enrollment | ||
185 | sessionId = TheForm.SessionId.value | ||
186 | reqHardware = FALSE | ||
187 | C = TheForm.Country.value | ||
188 | SP = TheForm.StateOrProvince.value | ||
189 | L = TheForm.Location.value | ||
190 | O = TheForm.Organization.value | ||
191 | OU = TheForm.OrganizationalUnit.value | ||
192 | CN = TheForm.CommonName.value | ||
193 | Email = TheForm.EmailAddress.value | ||
194 | szPurpose = "ClientAuth" | ||
195 | doAcceptanceUINow = FALSE | ||
196 | doOnline = TRUE | ||
197 | |||
198 | DN = "" | ||
199 | |||
200 | Call Add_RDN("C", C) | ||
201 | Call Add_RDN("S", SP) | ||
202 | Call Add_RDN("L", L) | ||
203 | Call Add_RDN("O", O) | ||
204 | Call Add_RDN("OU", OU) | ||
205 | Call Add_RDN("CN", CN) | ||
206 | Call Add_RDN("1.2.840.113549.1.9.1", Email) | ||
207 | ' rsadsi | ||
208 | ' pkcs | ||
209 | ' pkcs9 | ||
210 | ' eMailAddress | ||
211 | On Error Resume Next | ||
212 | sz10 = certHelper.GenerateKeyPair(sessionId, _ | ||
213 | FALSE, DN, 0, ClientAuth, FASLE, TRUE, 1)_ | ||
214 | theError = Err.Number | ||
215 | On Error Goto 0 | ||
216 | if (sz10 = Empty OR theError <> 0) Then | ||
217 | sz = "The error '" & Hex(theError) & "' occurred." & chr(13) & _ | ||
218 | chr(10) & "Your credentials could not be generated." | ||
219 | result = MsgBox(sz, 0, "Credentials Enrollment") | ||
220 | Exit Sub | ||
221 | else | ||
222 | TheForm.Request.value = sz10 | ||
223 | TheForm.Submit | ||
224 | end if | ||
225 | End Sub | ||
226 | |||
227 | Sub Add_RDN(sn, value) | ||
228 | if (value <> "") then | ||
229 | if (DN <> "") then | ||
230 | DN = DN & "; " | ||
231 | end if | ||
232 | DN = DN & sn & "=" & value | ||
233 | end if | ||
234 | End Sub | ||
235 | </SCRIPT> | ||
236 | </BODY> | ||
237 | </HTML> | ||
238 | EOF | ||
239 | -----END ms-enroll.cgi----- | ||
240 | |||
241 | Second, how to extract the request and feed the certificate back? We need to | ||
242 | "normalize" the base64 encoding of the PKCS#10 format which means | ||
243 | regenerating the lines and wrapping with BEGIN and END line. This is done by | ||
244 | gawk. The request is taken by ca the normal way. Then the cert needs to be | ||
245 | packed into a PKCS#7 structure (note: the use of a CRL is necessary for | ||
246 | crl2pkcs7 as of version 0.6.6. Starting with 0.8.0 it it might probably be | ||
247 | ommited). Finally we need to format the PKCS#7 object and generate the HTML | ||
248 | text. I use two templates to have a clearer script. | ||
249 | |||
250 | 1st note: postit2 is slightly modified from a program I found at ncsa's ftp | ||
251 | site. Grab it from http://www.easterngraphics.com/certs/IX9704/postit2.c. You | ||
252 | need utils.c from there too. | ||
253 | |||
254 | 2nd note: I'm note quite sure wether the gawk script really handles all | ||
255 | possible inputs for the request right! Today I don't use this construction | ||
256 | anymore myself. | ||
257 | |||
258 | 3d note: the cert must be of version 3! This could be done with the nsComment | ||
259 | line in ssleay.cnf... | ||
260 | |||
261 | ------BEGIN ms-gencert.cgi----- | ||
262 | #!/bin/sh | ||
263 | FILE="/tmp/"`date '+%y%m%d%H%M%S'-`$$ | ||
264 | rm -f "$FILE".* | ||
265 | |||
266 | HOME=`pwd`; export HOME # as ssleay.cnf insists on having such an env var | ||
267 | cd /usr/local/ssl #where demoCA (as named in ssleay.conf) is located | ||
268 | |||
269 | postit2 -s " " -i 0x0d > "$FILE".inp # process the FORM vars | ||
270 | |||
271 | SESSION_ID=`gawk '$1 == "SessionId" { print $2; exit }' "$FILE".inp` | ||
272 | |||
273 | gawk \ | ||
274 | 'BEGIN { \ | ||
275 | OFS = ""; \ | ||
276 | print "-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----"; \ | ||
277 | req_seen=0 \ | ||
278 | } \ | ||
279 | $1 == "Request" { \ | ||
280 | req_seen=1; \ | ||
281 | if (length($2) == 72) print($2); \ | ||
282 | lastline=$2; \ | ||
283 | next; \ | ||
284 | } \ | ||
285 | { \ | ||
286 | if (req_seen == 1) { \ | ||
287 | if (length($1) >= 72) print($1); \ | ||
288 | else if (length(lastline) < 72) { \ | ||
289 | req_seen=0; \ | ||
290 | print (lastline,$1); \ | ||
291 | } \ | ||
292 | lastline=$1; \ | ||
293 | } \ | ||
294 | } \ | ||
295 | END { \ | ||
296 | print "-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----"; \ | ||
297 | }' > "$FILE".pem < "$FILE".inp | ||
298 | |||
299 | ssleay ca -batch -in "$FILE".pem -key passwd -out "$FILE".out | ||
300 | ssleay crl2pkcs7 -certfile "$FILE".out -out "$FILE".pkcs7 -in demoCA/crl.pem | ||
301 | |||
302 | sed s/template_for_sessId/$SESSION_ID/ <ms-enroll2a.html >"$FILE".cert | ||
303 | /usr/local/bin/gawk \ | ||
304 | 'BEGIN { \ | ||
305 | OFS = ""; \ | ||
306 | dq = sprintf("%c",34); \ | ||
307 | } \ | ||
308 | $0 ~ "PKCS7" { next; } \ | ||
309 | { \ | ||
310 | print dq$0dq" & _"; \ | ||
311 | }' <"$FILE".pkcs7 >> "$FILE".cert | ||
312 | cat ms-enroll2b.html >>"$FILE".cert | ||
313 | |||
314 | echo Content-type: text/html | ||
315 | echo Content-length: `wc -c "$FILE".cert` | ||
316 | echo | ||
317 | cat "$FILE".cert | ||
318 | rm -f "$FILE".* | ||
319 | -----END ms-gencert.cgi----- | ||
320 | |||
321 | ----BEGIN ms-enroll2a.html---- | ||
322 | <HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Certificate Acceptance Test Page</TITLE></HEAD><BODY> | ||
323 | |||
324 | <OBJECT | ||
325 | classid="clsid:33BEC9E0-F78F-11cf-B782-00C04FD7BF43" | ||
326 | codebase=certenr3.dll | ||
327 | id=certHelper | ||
328 | > | ||
329 | </OBJECT> | ||
330 | |||
331 | <CENTER> | ||
332 | <H2>Your personal certificate</H2> | ||
333 | <BR><HR WIDTH=50%><BR><P> | ||
334 | Press the button! | ||
335 | <P><INPUT TYPE=BUTTON VALUE="Nimm mich!" NAME="InstallCert"> | ||
336 | </CENTER> | ||
337 | <BR><HR WIDTH=50%><BR> | ||
338 | |||
339 | <SCRIPT LANGUAGE=VBS> | ||
340 | Sub InstallCert_OnClick | ||
341 | |||
342 | sessionId = "template_for_sessId" | ||
343 | credentials = "" & _ | ||
344 | ----END ms-enroll2a.html---- | ||
345 | |||
346 | ----BEGIN ms-enroll2b.html---- | ||
347 | "" | ||
348 | On Error Resume Next | ||
349 | result = certHelper.AcceptCredentials(sessionId, credentials, 0, | ||
350 | FALSE) | ||
351 | if (IsEmpty(result)) Then | ||
352 | sz = "The error '" & Err.Number & "' occurred." & chr(13) & | ||
353 | chr(10) & "This Digital ID could not be registered." | ||
354 | msgOut = MsgBox(sz, 0, "Credentials Registration Error") | ||
355 | navigate "error.html" | ||
356 | else | ||
357 | sz = "Digital ID successfully registered." | ||
358 | msgOut = MsgBox(sz, 0, "Credentials Registration") | ||
359 | navigate "success.html" | ||
360 | end if | ||
361 | Exit Sub | ||
362 | End Sub | ||
363 | </SCRIPT> | ||
364 | </BODY> | ||
365 | </HTML> | ||
366 | ----END ms-enroll2b.html---- | ||
367 | |||
368 | 4.) What do do with the cert? | ||
369 | ----------------------------- | ||
370 | |||
371 | The cert is visible (without restarting MSIE) under the following menu: | ||
372 | View->Options->Security->Personal certs. You can examine it's contents at | ||
373 | least partially. | ||
374 | |||
375 | To use it for client authentication you need to use SSL3.0 (fortunately | ||
376 | SSLeay supports it with 0.8.0). Furthermore MSIE is told to only supports a | ||
377 | kind of automatic selection of certs (I personally wasn't able to test it | ||
378 | myself). But there is a requirement that the issuer of the server cert and | ||
379 | the issuer of the client cert needs to be the same (according to a developer | ||
380 | from MS). Which means: you need may more then one cert to talk to all | ||
381 | servers... | ||
382 | |||
383 | I'm sure we will get a bit more experience after ApacheSSL is available for | ||
384 | SSLeay 0.8.8. | ||
385 | |||
386 | |||
387 | I hope you enjoyed reading and that in future questions on this topic will | ||
388 | rarely appear on ssl-users@moncom.com ;-) | ||
389 | |||
390 | Ilmenau, 9th of June 1997 | ||
391 | Holger Reif <reif@prakinf.tu-ilmenau.de> | ||
392 | -- | ||
393 | read you later - Holger Reif | ||
394 | ---------------------------------------- Signaturprojekt Deutsche Einheit | ||
395 | TU Ilmenau - Informatik - Telematik (Verdamp lang her) | ||
396 | Holger.Reif@PrakInf.TU-Ilmenau.DE Alt wie ein Baum werden, um ueber | ||
397 | http://Remus.PrakInf.TU-Ilmenau.DE/Reif/ alle 7 Bruecken gehen zu koennen | ||
398 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ns-ca.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ns-ca.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..836883e1a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ns-ca.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ | |||
1 | The following documentation was supplied by Jeff Barber, who provided the | ||
2 | patch to the CA program to add this functionality. | ||
3 | |||
4 | eric | ||
5 | -- | ||
6 | Jeff Barber Email: jeffb@issl.atl.hp.com | ||
7 | |||
8 | Hewlett Packard Phone: (404) 648-9503 | ||
9 | Internet and System Security Lab Fax: (404) 648-9516 | ||
10 | |||
11 | oo | ||
12 | ---------------------cut /\ here for ns-ca.doc ------------------------------ | ||
13 | |||
14 | This document briefly describes how to use SSLeay to implement a | ||
15 | certificate authority capable of dynamically serving up client | ||
16 | certificates for version 3.0 beta 5 (and presumably later) versions of | ||
17 | the Netscape Navigator. Before describing how this is done, it's | ||
18 | important to understand a little about how the browser implements its | ||
19 | client certificate support. This is documented in some detail in the | ||
20 | URLs based at <URL:http://home.netscape.com/eng/security/certs.html>. | ||
21 | Here's a brief overview: | ||
22 | |||
23 | - The Navigator supports a new HTML tag "KEYGEN" which will cause | ||
24 | the browser to generate an RSA key pair when you submit a form | ||
25 | containing the tag. The public key, along with an optional | ||
26 | challenge (supposedly provided for use in certificate revocation | ||
27 | but I don't use it) is signed, DER-encoded, base-64 encoded | ||
28 | and sent to the web server as the value of the variable | ||
29 | whose NAME is provided in the KEYGEN tag. The private key is | ||
30 | stored by the browser in a local key database. | ||
31 | |||
32 | This "Signed Public Key And Challenge" (SPKAC) arrives formatted | ||
33 | into 64 character lines (which are of course URL-encoded when | ||
34 | sent via HTTP -- i.e. spaces, newlines and most punctuatation are | ||
35 | encoded as "%HH" where HH is the hex equivalent of the ASCII code). | ||
36 | Note that the SPKAC does not contain the other usual attributes | ||
37 | of a certificate request, especially the subject name fields. | ||
38 | These must be otherwise encoded in the form for submission along | ||
39 | with the SPKAC. | ||
40 | |||
41 | - Either immediately (in response to this form submission), or at | ||
42 | some later date (a real CA will probably verify your identity in | ||
43 | some way before issuing the certificate), a web server can send a | ||
44 | certificate based on the public key and other attributes back to | ||
45 | the browser by encoding it in DER (the binary form) and sending it | ||
46 | to the browser as MIME type: | ||
47 | "Content-type: application/x-x509-user-cert" | ||
48 | |||
49 | The browser uses the public key encoded in the certificate to | ||
50 | associate the certificate with the appropriate private key in | ||
51 | its local key database. Now, the certificate is "installed". | ||
52 | |||
53 | - When a server wants to require authentication based on client | ||
54 | certificates, it uses the right signals via the SSL protocol to | ||
55 | trigger the Navigator to ask you which certificate you want to | ||
56 | send. Whether the certificate is accepted is dependent on CA | ||
57 | certificates and so forth installed in the server and is beyond | ||
58 | the scope of this document. | ||
59 | |||
60 | |||
61 | Now, here's how the SSLeay package can be used to provide client | ||
62 | certficates: | ||
63 | |||
64 | - You prepare a file for input to the SSLeay ca application. | ||
65 | The file contains a number of "name = value" pairs that identify | ||
66 | the subject. The names here are the same subject name component | ||
67 | identifiers used in the CA section of the lib/ssleay.conf file, | ||
68 | such as "emailAddress", "commonName" "organizationName" and so | ||
69 | forth. Both the long version and the short version (e.g. "Email", | ||
70 | "CN", "O") can be used. | ||
71 | |||
72 | One more name is supported: this one is "SPKAC". Its value | ||
73 | is simply the value of the base-64 encoded SPKAC sent by the | ||
74 | browser (with all the newlines and other space charaters | ||
75 | removed -- and newline escapes are NOT supported). | ||
76 | |||
77 | [ As of SSLeay 0.6.4, multiple lines are supported. | ||
78 | Put a \ at the end of each line and it will be joined with the | ||
79 | previous line with the '\n' removed - eay ] | ||
80 | |||
81 | Here's a sample input file: | ||
82 | |||
83 | C = US | ||
84 | SP = Georgia | ||
85 | O = Some Organization, Inc. | ||
86 | OU = Netscape Compatibility Group | ||
87 | CN = John X. Doe | ||
88 | Email = jxdoe@someorg.com | ||
89 | SPKAC = MIG0MGAwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBIAkEAwmk6FMJ4uAVIYbcvIOx5+bDGTfvL8X5gE+R67ccMk6rCSGbVQz2cetyQtnI+VIs0NwdD6wjuSuVtVFbLoHonowIDAQABFgAwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQADQQBFZDUWFl6BJdomtN1Bi53mwijy1rRgJ4YirF15yBEDM3DjAQkKXHYOIX+qpz4KXKnl6EYxTnGSFL5wWt8X2iyx | ||
90 | |||
91 | - You execute the ca command (either from a CGI program run out of | ||
92 | the web server, or as a later manual task) giving it the above | ||
93 | file as input. For example, if the file were named /tmp/cert.req, | ||
94 | you'd run: | ||
95 | $SSLDIR/bin/ca -spkac /tmp/cert.req -out /tmp/cert | ||
96 | |||
97 | The output is in DER format (binary) if a -out argument is | ||
98 | provided, as above; otherwise, it's in the PEM format (base-64 | ||
99 | encoded DER). Also, the "-batch" switch is implied by the | ||
100 | "-spkac" so you don't get asked whether to complete the signing | ||
101 | (probably it shouldn't work this way but I was only interested | ||
102 | in hacking together an online CA that could be used for issuing | ||
103 | test certificates). | ||
104 | |||
105 | The "-spkac" capability doesn't support multiple files (I think). | ||
106 | |||
107 | Any CHALLENGE provided in the SPKAC is simply ignored. | ||
108 | |||
109 | The interactions between the identification fields you provide | ||
110 | and those identified in your lib/ssleay.conf are the same as if | ||
111 | you did an ordinary "ca -in infile -out outfile" -- that is, if | ||
112 | something is marked as required in the ssleay.conf file and it | ||
113 | isn't found in the -spkac file, the certificate won't be issued. | ||
114 | |||
115 | - Now, you pick up the output from /tmp/cert and pass it back to | ||
116 | the Navigator prepending the Content-type string described earlier. | ||
117 | |||
118 | - In order to run the ca command out of a CGI program, you must | ||
119 | provide a password to decrypt the CA's private key. You can | ||
120 | do this by using "echo MyKeyPassword | $SSLDIR/bin/ca ..." | ||
121 | I think there's a way to not encrypt the key file in the first | ||
122 | place, but I didn't see how to do that, so I made a small change | ||
123 | to the library that allows the password to be accepted from a pipe. | ||
124 | Either way is UTTERLY INSECURE and a real CA would never do that. | ||
125 | |||
126 | [ You can use the 'ssleay rsa' command to remove the password | ||
127 | from the private key, or you can use the '-key' option to the | ||
128 | ca command to specify the decryption key on the command line | ||
129 | or use the -nodes option when generating the key. | ||
130 | ca will try to clear the command line version of the password | ||
131 | but for quite a few operating systems, this is not possible. | ||
132 | - eric ] | ||
133 | |||
134 | So, what do you have to do to make use of this stuff to create an online | ||
135 | demo CA capability with SSLeay? | ||
136 | |||
137 | 1 Create an HTML form for your users. The form should contain | ||
138 | fields for all of the required or optional fields in ssleay.conf. | ||
139 | The form must contain a KEYGEN tag somewhere with at least a NAME | ||
140 | attribute. | ||
141 | |||
142 | 2 Create a CGI program to process the form input submitted by the | ||
143 | browser. The CGI program must URL-decode the variables and create | ||
144 | the file described above, containing subject identification info | ||
145 | as well as the SPKAC block. It should then run the the ca program | ||
146 | with the -spkac option. If it works (check the exit status), | ||
147 | return the new certificate with the appropriate MIME type. If not, | ||
148 | return the output of the ca command with MIME type "text/plain". | ||
149 | |||
150 | 3 Set up your web server to accept connections signed by your demo | ||
151 | CA. This probably involves obtaining the PEM-encoded CA certificate | ||
152 | (ordinarily in $SSLDIR/CA/cacert.pem) and installing it into a | ||
153 | server database. See your server manual for instructions. | ||
154 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/obj.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/obj.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bad347c936 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/obj.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ | |||
1 | The Object library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | As part of my Crypto library, I found I required a method of identifying various | ||
4 | objects. These objects normally had 3 different values associated with | ||
5 | them, a short text name, a long (or lower case) text name, and an | ||
6 | ASN.1 Object Identifier (which is a sequence of numbers). | ||
7 | This library contains a static list of objects and functions to lookup | ||
8 | according to one type and to return the other types. | ||
9 | |||
10 | To use these routines, 'Object.h' needs to be included. | ||
11 | |||
12 | For each supported object, #define entries are defined as follows | ||
13 | #define SN_Algorithm "Algorithm" | ||
14 | #define LN_algorithm "algorithm" | ||
15 | #define NID_algorithm 38 | ||
16 | #define OBJ_algorithm 1L,3L,14L,3L,2L | ||
17 | |||
18 | SN_ stands for short name. | ||
19 | LN_ stands for either long name or lowercase name. | ||
20 | NID_ stands for Numeric ID. I each object has a unique NID and this | ||
21 | should be used internally to identify objects. | ||
22 | OBJ_ stands for ASN.1 Object Identifier or ASN1_OBJECT as defined in the | ||
23 | ASN1 routines. These values are used in ASN1 encoding. | ||
24 | |||
25 | The following functions are to be used to return pointers into a static | ||
26 | definition of these types. What this means is "don't try to free() any | ||
27 | pointers returned from these functions. | ||
28 | |||
29 | ASN1_OBJECT *OBJ_nid2obj( | ||
30 | int n); | ||
31 | Return the ASN1_OBJECT that corresponds to a NID of n. | ||
32 | |||
33 | char *OBJ_nid2ln( | ||
34 | int n); | ||
35 | Return the long/lower case name of the object represented by the | ||
36 | NID of n. | ||
37 | |||
38 | char *OBJ_nid2sn( | ||
39 | int n); | ||
40 | Return the short name for the object represented by the NID of n. | ||
41 | |||
42 | ASN1_OBJECT *OBJ_dup( | ||
43 | ASN1_OBJECT *o); | ||
44 | Duplicate and return a new ASN1_OBJECT that is the same as the | ||
45 | passed parameter. | ||
46 | |||
47 | int OBJ_obj2nid( | ||
48 | ASN1_OBJECT *o); | ||
49 | Given ASN1_OBJECT o, return the NID that corresponds. | ||
50 | |||
51 | int OBJ_ln2nid( | ||
52 | char *s); | ||
53 | Given the long/lower case name 's', return the NID of the object. | ||
54 | |||
55 | int OBJ_sn2nid( | ||
56 | char *s); | ||
57 | Given the short name 's', return the NID of the object. | ||
58 | |||
59 | char *OBJ_bsearch( | ||
60 | char *key, | ||
61 | char *base, | ||
62 | int num, | ||
63 | int size, | ||
64 | int (*cmp)()); | ||
65 | Since I have come across a few platforms that do not have the | ||
66 | bsearch() function, OBJ_bsearch is my version of that function. | ||
67 | Feel free to use this function, but you may as well just use the | ||
68 | normal system bsearch(3) if it is present. This version also | ||
69 | has tolerance of being passed NULL pointers. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rand.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rand.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..da02a07f64 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rand.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ | |||
1 | My Random number library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | These routines can be used to generate pseudo random numbers and can be | ||
4 | used to 'seed' the pseudo random number generator (RNG). The RNG make no | ||
5 | effort to reproduce the same random number stream with each execution. | ||
6 | Various other routines in the SSLeay library 'seed' the RNG when suitable | ||
7 | 'random' input data is available. Read the section at the end for details | ||
8 | on the design of the RNG. | ||
9 | |||
10 | void RAND_bytes( | ||
11 | unsigned char *buf, | ||
12 | int num); | ||
13 | This routine puts 'num' random bytes into 'buf'. One should make | ||
14 | sure RAND_seed() has been called before using this routine. | ||
15 | |||
16 | void RAND_seed( | ||
17 | unsigned char *buf, | ||
18 | int num); | ||
19 | This routine adds more 'seed' data the RNG state. 'num' bytes | ||
20 | are added to the RNG state, they are taken from 'buf'. This | ||
21 | routine can be called with sensitive data such as user entered | ||
22 | passwords. This sensitive data is in no way recoverable from | ||
23 | the RAND library routines or state. Try to pass as much data | ||
24 | from 'random' sources as possible into the RNG via this function. | ||
25 | Also strongly consider using the RAND_load_file() and | ||
26 | RAND_write_file() routines. | ||
27 | |||
28 | void RAND_cleanup(); | ||
29 | When a program has finished with the RAND library, if it so | ||
30 | desires, it can 'zero' all RNG state. | ||
31 | |||
32 | The following 3 routines are convenience routines that can be used to | ||
33 | 'save' and 'restore' data from/to the RNG and it's state. | ||
34 | Since the more 'random' data that is feed as seed data the better, why not | ||
35 | keep it around between executions of the program? Of course the | ||
36 | application should pass more 'random' data in via RAND_seed() and | ||
37 | make sure no-one can read the 'random' data file. | ||
38 | |||
39 | char *RAND_file_name( | ||
40 | char *buf, | ||
41 | int size); | ||
42 | This routine returns a 'default' name for the location of a 'rand' | ||
43 | file. The 'rand' file should keep a sequence of random bytes used | ||
44 | to initialise the RNG. The filename is put in 'buf'. Buf is 'size' | ||
45 | bytes long. Buf is returned if things go well, if they do not, | ||
46 | NULL is returned. The 'rand' file name is generated in the | ||
47 | following way. First, if there is a 'RANDFILE' environment | ||
48 | variable, it is returned. Second, if there is a 'HOME' environment | ||
49 | variable, $HOME/.rand is returned. Third, NULL is returned. NULL | ||
50 | is also returned if a buf would overflow. | ||
51 | |||
52 | int RAND_load_file( | ||
53 | char *file, | ||
54 | long number); | ||
55 | This function 'adds' the 'file' into the RNG state. It does this by | ||
56 | doing a RAND_seed() on the value returned from a stat() system call | ||
57 | on the file and if 'number' is non-zero, upto 'number' bytes read | ||
58 | from the file. The number of bytes passed to RAND_seed() is returned. | ||
59 | |||
60 | int RAND_write_file( | ||
61 | char *file), | ||
62 | RAND_write_file() writes N random bytes to the file 'file', where | ||
63 | N is the size of the internal RND state (currently 1k). | ||
64 | This is a suitable method of saving RNG state for reloading via | ||
65 | RAND_load_file(). | ||
66 | |||
67 | What follows is a description of this RNG and a description of the rational | ||
68 | behind it's design. | ||
69 | |||
70 | It should be noted that this RNG is intended to be used to generate | ||
71 | 'random' keys for various ciphers including generation of DH and RSA keys. | ||
72 | |||
73 | It should also be noted that I have just created a system that I am happy with. | ||
74 | It may be overkill but that does not worry me. I have not spent that much | ||
75 | time on this algorithm so if there are glaring errors, please let me know. | ||
76 | Speed has not been a consideration in the design of these routines. | ||
77 | |||
78 | First up I will state the things I believe I need for a good RNG. | ||
79 | 1) A good hashing algorithm to mix things up and to convert the RNG 'state' | ||
80 | to random numbers. | ||
81 | 2) An initial source of random 'state'. | ||
82 | 3) The state should be very large. If the RNG is being used to generate | ||
83 | 4096 bit RSA keys, 2 2048 bit random strings are required (at a minimum). | ||
84 | If your RNG state only has 128 bits, you are obviously limiting the | ||
85 | search space to 128 bits, not 2048. I'm probably getting a little | ||
86 | carried away on this last point but it does indicate that it may not be | ||
87 | a bad idea to keep quite a lot of RNG state. It should be easier to | ||
88 | break a cipher than guess the RNG seed data. | ||
89 | 4) Any RNG seed data should influence all subsequent random numbers | ||
90 | generated. This implies that any random seed data entered will have | ||
91 | an influence on all subsequent random numbers generated. | ||
92 | 5) When using data to seed the RNG state, the data used should not be | ||
93 | extractable from the RNG state. I believe this should be a | ||
94 | requirement because one possible source of 'secret' semi random | ||
95 | data would be a private key or a password. This data must | ||
96 | not be disclosed by either subsequent random numbers or a | ||
97 | 'core' dump left by a program crash. | ||
98 | 6) Given the same initial 'state', 2 systems should deviate in their RNG state | ||
99 | (and hence the random numbers generated) over time if at all possible. | ||
100 | 7) Given the random number output stream, it should not be possible to determine | ||
101 | the RNG state or the next random number. | ||
102 | |||
103 | |||
104 | The algorithm is as follows. | ||
105 | |||
106 | There is global state made up of a 1023 byte buffer (the 'state'), a | ||
107 | working message digest ('md') and a counter ('count'). | ||
108 | |||
109 | Whenever seed data is added, it is inserted into the 'state' as | ||
110 | follows. | ||
111 | The input is chopped up into units of 16 bytes (or less for | ||
112 | the last block). Each of these blocks is run through the MD5 | ||
113 | message digest. The data passed to the MD5 digest is the | ||
114 | current 'md', the same number of bytes from the 'state' | ||
115 | (the location determined by in incremented looping index) as | ||
116 | the current 'block' and the new key data 'block'. The result | ||
117 | of this is kept in 'md' and also xored into the 'state' at the | ||
118 | same locations that were used as input into the MD5. | ||
119 | I believe this system addresses points 1 (MD5), 3 (the 'state'), | ||
120 | 4 (via the 'md'), 5 (by the use of MD5 and xor). | ||
121 | |||
122 | When bytes are extracted from the RNG, the following process is used. | ||
123 | For each group of 8 bytes (or less), we do the following, | ||
124 | Input into MD5, the top 8 bytes from 'md', the byte that are | ||
125 | to be overwritten by the random bytes and bytes from the | ||
126 | 'state' (incrementing looping index). From this digest output | ||
127 | (which is kept in 'md'), the top (upto) 8 bytes are | ||
128 | returned to the caller and the bottom (upto) 8 bytes are xored | ||
129 | into the 'state'. | ||
130 | Finally, after we have finished 'generation' random bytes for the | ||
131 | called, 'count' (which is incremented) and 'md' are fed into MD5 and | ||
132 | the results are kept in 'md'. | ||
133 | I believe the above addressed points 1 (use of MD5), 6 (by | ||
134 | hashing into the 'state' the 'old' data from the caller that | ||
135 | is about to be overwritten) and 7 (by not using the 8 bytes | ||
136 | given to the caller to update the 'state', but they are used | ||
137 | to update 'md'). | ||
138 | |||
139 | So of the points raised, only 2 is not addressed, but sources of | ||
140 | random data will always be a problem. | ||
141 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc2.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc2.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..efab015bd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc2.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ | |||
1 | The RC2 library. | ||
2 | |||
3 | RC2 is a block cipher that operates on 64bit (8 byte) quantities. It | ||
4 | uses variable size key, but 128bit (16 byte) key would normally be considered | ||
5 | good. It can be used in all the modes that DES can be used. This | ||
6 | library implements the ecb, cbc, cfb64, ofb64 modes. | ||
7 | |||
8 | I have implemented this library from an article posted to sci.crypt on | ||
9 | 11-Feb-1996. I personally don't know how far to trust the RC2 cipher. | ||
10 | While it is capable of having a key of any size, not much reseach has | ||
11 | publically been done on it at this point in time (Apr-1996) | ||
12 | since the cipher has only been public for a few months :-) | ||
13 | It is of a similar speed to DES and IDEA, so unless it is required for | ||
14 | meeting some standard (SSLv2, perhaps S/MIME), it would probably be advisable | ||
15 | to stick to IDEA, or for the paranoid, Tripple DES. | ||
16 | |||
17 | Mind you, having said all that, I should mention that I just read alot and | ||
18 | implement ciphers, I'm a 'babe in the woods' when it comes to evaluating | ||
19 | ciphers :-). | ||
20 | |||
21 | For all calls that have an 'input' and 'output' variables, they can be the | ||
22 | same. | ||
23 | |||
24 | This library requires the inclusion of 'rc2.h'. | ||
25 | |||
26 | All of the encryption functions take what is called an RC2_KEY as an | ||
27 | argument. An RC2_KEY is an expanded form of the RC2 key. | ||
28 | For all modes of the RC2 algorithm, the RC2_KEY used for | ||
29 | decryption is the same one that was used for encryption. | ||
30 | |||
31 | The define RC2_ENCRYPT is passed to specify encryption for the functions | ||
32 | that require an encryption/decryption flag. RC2_DECRYPT is passed to | ||
33 | specify decryption. | ||
34 | |||
35 | Please note that any of the encryption modes specified in my DES library | ||
36 | could be used with RC2. I have only implemented ecb, cbc, cfb64 and | ||
37 | ofb64 for the following reasons. | ||
38 | - ecb is the basic RC2 encryption. | ||
39 | - cbc is the normal 'chaining' form for block ciphers. | ||
40 | - cfb64 can be used to encrypt single characters, therefore input and output | ||
41 | do not need to be a multiple of 8. | ||
42 | - ofb64 is similar to cfb64 but is more like a stream cipher, not as | ||
43 | secure (not cipher feedback) but it does not have an encrypt/decrypt mode. | ||
44 | - If you want triple RC2, thats 384 bits of key and you must be totally | ||
45 | obsessed with security. Still, if you want it, it is simple enough to | ||
46 | copy the function from the DES library and change the des_encrypt to | ||
47 | RC2_encrypt; an exercise left for the paranoid reader :-). | ||
48 | |||
49 | The functions are as follows: | ||
50 | |||
51 | void RC2_set_key( | ||
52 | RC2_KEY *ks; | ||
53 | int len; | ||
54 | unsigned char *key; | ||
55 | int bits; | ||
56 | RC2_set_key converts an 'len' byte key into a RC2_KEY. | ||
57 | A 'ks' is an expanded form of the 'key' which is used to | ||
58 | perform actual encryption. It can be regenerated from the RC2 key | ||
59 | so it only needs to be kept when encryption or decryption is about | ||
60 | to occur. Don't save or pass around RC2_KEY's since they | ||
61 | are CPU architecture dependent, 'key's are not. RC2 is an | ||
62 | interesting cipher in that it can be used with a variable length | ||
63 | key. 'len' is the length of 'key' to be used as the key. | ||
64 | A 'len' of 16 is recomended. The 'bits' argument is an | ||
65 | interesting addition which I only found out about in Aug 96. | ||
66 | BSAFE uses this parameter to 'limit' the number of bits used | ||
67 | for the key. To use the 'key' unmodified, set bits to 1024. | ||
68 | This is what old versions of my RC2 library did (SSLeay 0.6.3). | ||
69 | RSAs BSAFE library sets this parameter to be 128 if 128 bit | ||
70 | keys are being used. So to be compatable with BSAFE, set it | ||
71 | to 128, if you don't want to reduce RC2's key length, leave it | ||
72 | at 1024. | ||
73 | |||
74 | void RC2_encrypt( | ||
75 | unsigned long *data, | ||
76 | RC2_KEY *key, | ||
77 | int encrypt); | ||
78 | This is the RC2 encryption function that gets called by just about | ||
79 | every other RC2 routine in the library. You should not use this | ||
80 | function except to implement 'modes' of RC2. I say this because the | ||
81 | functions that call this routine do the conversion from 'char *' to | ||
82 | long, and this needs to be done to make sure 'non-aligned' memory | ||
83 | access do not occur. | ||
84 | Data is a pointer to 2 unsigned long's and key is the | ||
85 | RC2_KEY to use. Encryption or decryption is indicated by 'encrypt'. | ||
86 | which can have the values RC2_ENCRYPT or RC2_DECRYPT. | ||
87 | |||
88 | void RC2_ecb_encrypt( | ||
89 | unsigned char *in, | ||
90 | unsigned char *out, | ||
91 | RC2_KEY *key, | ||
92 | int encrypt); | ||
93 | This is the basic Electronic Code Book form of RC2 (in DES this | ||
94 | mode is called Electronic Code Book so I'm going to use the term | ||
95 | for rc2 as well. | ||
96 | Input is encrypted into output using the key represented by | ||
97 | key. Depending on the encrypt, encryption or | ||
98 | decryption occurs. Input is 8 bytes long and output is 8 bytes. | ||
99 | |||
100 | void RC2_cbc_encrypt( | ||
101 | unsigned char *in, | ||
102 | unsigned char *out, | ||
103 | long length, | ||
104 | RC2_KEY *ks, | ||
105 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
106 | int encrypt); | ||
107 | This routine implements RC2 in Cipher Block Chaining mode. | ||
108 | Input, which should be a multiple of 8 bytes is encrypted | ||
109 | (or decrypted) to output which will also be a multiple of 8 bytes. | ||
110 | The number of bytes is in length (and from what I've said above, | ||
111 | should be a multiple of 8). If length is not a multiple of 8, bad | ||
112 | things will probably happen. ivec is the initialisation vector. | ||
113 | This function updates iv after each call so that it can be passed to | ||
114 | the next call to RC2_cbc_encrypt(). | ||
115 | |||
116 | void RC2_cfb64_encrypt( | ||
117 | unsigned char *in, | ||
118 | unsigned char *out, | ||
119 | long length, | ||
120 | RC2_KEY *schedule, | ||
121 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
122 | int *num, | ||
123 | int encrypt); | ||
124 | This is one of the more useful functions in this RC2 library, it | ||
125 | implements CFB mode of RC2 with 64bit feedback. | ||
126 | This allows you to encrypt an arbitrary number of bytes, | ||
127 | you do not require 8 byte padding. Each call to this | ||
128 | routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec | ||
129 | and num. Num contains 'how far' we are though ivec. | ||
130 | 'Encrypt' is used to indicate encryption or decryption. | ||
131 | CFB64 mode operates by using the cipher to generate a stream | ||
132 | of bytes which is used to encrypt the plain text. | ||
133 | The cipher text is then encrypted to generate the next 64 bits to | ||
134 | be xored (incrementally) with the next 64 bits of plain | ||
135 | text. As can be seen from this, to encrypt or decrypt, | ||
136 | the same 'cipher stream' needs to be generated but the way the next | ||
137 | block of data is gathered for encryption is different for | ||
138 | encryption and decryption. | ||
139 | |||
140 | void RC2_ofb64_encrypt( | ||
141 | unsigned char *in, | ||
142 | unsigned char *out, | ||
143 | long length, | ||
144 | RC2_KEY *schedule, | ||
145 | unsigned char *ivec, | ||
146 | int *num); | ||
147 | This functions implements OFB mode of RC2 with 64bit feedback. | ||
148 | This allows you to encrypt an arbitrary number of bytes, | ||
149 | you do not require 8 byte padding. Each call to this | ||
150 | routine will encrypt the input bytes to output and then update ivec | ||
151 | and num. Num contains 'how far' we are though ivec. | ||
152 | This is in effect a stream cipher, there is no encryption or | ||
153 | decryption mode. | ||
154 | |||
155 | For reading passwords, I suggest using des_read_pw_string() from my DES library. | ||
156 | To generate a password from a text string, I suggest using MD5 (or MD2) to | ||
157 | produce a 16 byte message digest that can then be passed directly to | ||
158 | RC2_set_key(). | ||
159 | |||
160 | ===== | ||
161 | For more information about the specific RC2 modes in this library | ||
162 | (ecb, cbc, cfb and ofb), read the section entitled 'Modes of DES' from the | ||
163 | documentation on my DES library. What is said about DES is directly | ||
164 | applicable for RC2. | ||
165 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc4.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc4.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4b2897eb74 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rc4.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ | |||
1 | The RC4 library. | ||
2 | RC4 is a stream cipher that operates on a byte stream. It can be used with | ||
3 | any length key but I would recommend normally using 16 bytes. | ||
4 | |||
5 | This library requires the inclusion of 'rc4.h'. | ||
6 | |||
7 | The RC4 encryption function takes what is called an RC4_KEY as an argument. | ||
8 | The RC4_KEY is generated by the RC4_set_key function from the key bytes. | ||
9 | |||
10 | RC4, being a stream cipher, does not have an encryption or decryption mode. | ||
11 | It produces a stream of bytes that the input stream is xor'ed against and | ||
12 | so decryption is just a case of 'encrypting' again with the same key. | ||
13 | |||
14 | I have only put in one 'mode' for RC4 which is the normal one. This means | ||
15 | there is no initialisation vector and there is no feedback of the cipher | ||
16 | text into the cipher. This implies that you should not ever use the | ||
17 | same key twice if you can help it. If you do, you leave yourself open to | ||
18 | known plain text attacks; if you know the plain text and | ||
19 | corresponding cipher text in one message, all messages that used the same | ||
20 | key can have the cipher text decoded for the corresponding positions in the | ||
21 | cipher stream. | ||
22 | |||
23 | The main positive feature of RC4 is that it is a very fast cipher; about 4 | ||
24 | times faster that DES. This makes it ideally suited to protocols where the | ||
25 | key is randomly chosen, like SSL. | ||
26 | |||
27 | The functions are as follows: | ||
28 | |||
29 | void RC4_set_key( | ||
30 | RC4_KEY *key; | ||
31 | int len; | ||
32 | unsigned char *data); | ||
33 | This function initialises the RC4_KEY structure with the key passed | ||
34 | in 'data', which is 'len' bytes long. The key data can be any | ||
35 | length but 16 bytes seems to be a good number. | ||
36 | |||
37 | void RC4( | ||
38 | RC4_KEY *key; | ||
39 | unsigned long len; | ||
40 | unsigned char *in; | ||
41 | unsigned char *out); | ||
42 | Do the actual RC4 encryption/decryption. Using the 'key', 'len' | ||
43 | bytes are transformed from 'in' to 'out'. As mentioned above, | ||
44 | decryption is the operation as encryption. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/readme b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/readme new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..824d4fd0e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/readme | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ | |||
1 | This is the old 0.6.6 docuementation. Most of the cipher stuff is still | ||
2 | relevent but I'm working (very slowly) on new docuemtation. | ||
3 | The current version can be found online at | ||
4 | |||
5 | http://www.cryptsoft.com/ssleay/doc | ||
6 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ref.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ref.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..211559900d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ref.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ | |||
1 | I have lots more references etc, and will update this list in the future, | ||
2 | 30 Aug 1996 - eay | ||
3 | |||
4 | |||
5 | SSL The SSL Protocol - from Netscapes. | ||
6 | |||
7 | RC4 Newsgroups: sci.crypt | ||
8 | From: sterndark@netcom.com (David Sterndark) | ||
9 | Subject: RC4 Algorithm revealed. | ||
10 | Message-ID: <sternCvKL4B.Hyy@netcom.com> | ||
11 | |||
12 | RC2 Newsgroups: sci.crypt | ||
13 | From: pgut01@cs.auckland.ac.nz (Peter Gutmann) | ||
14 | Subject: Specification for Ron Rivests Cipher No.2 | ||
15 | Message-ID: <4fk39f$f70@net.auckland.ac.nz> | ||
16 | |||
17 | MD2 RFC1319 The MD2 Message-Digest Algorithm | ||
18 | MD5 RFC1321 The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm | ||
19 | |||
20 | X509 Certificates | ||
21 | RFC1421 Privacy Enhancement for Internet Electronic Mail: Part I | ||
22 | RFC1422 Privacy Enhancement for Internet Electronic Mail: Part II | ||
23 | RFC1423 Privacy Enhancement for Internet Electronic Mail: Part III | ||
24 | RFC1424 Privacy Enhancement for Internet Electronic Mail: Part IV | ||
25 | |||
26 | RSA and various standard encoding | ||
27 | PKCS#1 RSA Encryption Standard | ||
28 | PKCS#5 Password-Based Encryption Standard | ||
29 | PKCS#7 Cryptographic Message Syntax Standard | ||
30 | A Layman's Guide to a Subset of ASN.1, BER, and DER | ||
31 | An Overview of the PKCS Standards | ||
32 | Some Examples of the PKCS Standards | ||
33 | |||
34 | IDEA Chapter 3 The Block Cipher IDEA | ||
35 | |||
36 | RSA, prime number generation and bignum algorithms | ||
37 | Introduction To Algorithms, | ||
38 | Thomas Cormen, Charles Leiserson, Ronald Rivest, | ||
39 | Section 29 Arithmetic Circuits | ||
40 | Section 33 Number-Theoretic Algorithms | ||
41 | |||
42 | Fast Private Key algorithm | ||
43 | Fast Decipherment Algorithm for RSA Public-Key Cryptosystem | ||
44 | J.-J. Quisquater and C. Couvreur, Electronics Letters, | ||
45 | 14th October 1982, Vol. 18 No. 21 | ||
46 | |||
47 | Prime number generation and bignum algorithms. | ||
48 | PGP-2.3a | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/req.1 b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/req.1 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..684fda580e --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/req.1 | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ | |||
1 | The 'req' command is used to manipulate and deal with pkcs#10 | ||
2 | certificate requests. | ||
3 | |||
4 | It's default mode of operation is to load a certificate and then | ||
5 | write it out again. | ||
6 | |||
7 | By default the 'req' is read from stdin in 'PEM' format. | ||
8 | The -inform option can be used to specify 'pem' format or 'der' | ||
9 | format. PEM format is the base64 encoding of the DER format. | ||
10 | |||
11 | By default 'req' then writes the request back out. -outform can be used | ||
12 | to indicate the desired output format, be it 'pem' or 'der'. | ||
13 | |||
14 | To specify an input file, use the '-in' option and the '-out' option | ||
15 | can be used to specify the output file. | ||
16 | |||
17 | If you wish to perform a command and not output the certificate | ||
18 | request afterwards, use the '-noout' option. | ||
19 | |||
20 | When a certificate is loaded, it can be printed in a human readable | ||
21 | ascii format via the '-text' option. | ||
22 | |||
23 | To check that the signature on a certificate request is correct, use | ||
24 | the '-verify' option to make sure that the private key contained in the | ||
25 | certificate request corresponds to the signature. | ||
26 | |||
27 | Besides the default mode, there is also the 'generate a certificate | ||
28 | request' mode. There are several flags that trigger this mode. | ||
29 | |||
30 | -new will generate a new RSA key (if required) and then prompts | ||
31 | the user for details for the certificate request. | ||
32 | -newkey has an argument that is the number of bits to make the new | ||
33 | key. This function also triggers '-new'. | ||
34 | |||
35 | The '-new' option can have a key to use specified instead of having to | ||
36 | load one, '-key' is used to specify the file containg the key. | ||
37 | -keyform can be used to specify the format of the key. Only | ||
38 | 'pem' and 'der' formats are supported, later, 'netscape' format may be added. | ||
39 | |||
40 | Finally there is the '-x509' options which makes req output a self | ||
41 | signed x509 certificate instead of a certificate request. | ||
42 | |||
43 | Now as you may have noticed, there are lots of default options that | ||
44 | cannot be specified via the command line. They are held in a 'template' | ||
45 | or 'configuration file'. The -config option specifies which configuration | ||
46 | file to use. See conf.doc for details on the syntax of this file. | ||
47 | |||
48 | The req command uses the 'req' section of the config file. | ||
49 | |||
50 | --- | ||
51 | # The following variables are defined. For this example I will populate | ||
52 | # the various values | ||
53 | [ req ] | ||
54 | default_bits = 512 # default number of bits to use. | ||
55 | default_keyfile = testkey.pem # Where to write the generated keyfile | ||
56 | # if not specified. | ||
57 | distinguished_name= req_dn # The section that contains the | ||
58 | # information about which 'object' we | ||
59 | # want to put in the DN. | ||
60 | attributes = req_attr # The objects we want for the | ||
61 | # attributes field. | ||
62 | encrypt_rsa_key = no # Should we encrypt newly generated | ||
63 | # keys. I strongly recommend 'yes'. | ||
64 | |||
65 | # The distinguished name section. For the following entries, the | ||
66 | # object names must exist in the SSLeay header file objects.h. If they | ||
67 | # do not, they will be silently ignored. The entries have the following | ||
68 | # format. | ||
69 | # <object_name> => string to prompt with | ||
70 | # <object_name>_default => default value for people | ||
71 | # <object_name>_value => Automatically use this value for this field. | ||
72 | # <object_name>_min => minimum number of characters for data (def. 0) | ||
73 | # <object_name>_max => maximum number of characters for data (def. inf.) | ||
74 | # All of these entries are optional except for the first one. | ||
75 | [ req_dn ] | ||
76 | countryName = Country Name (2 letter code) | ||
77 | countryName_default = AU | ||
78 | |||
79 | stateOrProvinceName = State or Province Name (full name) | ||
80 | stateOrProvinceName_default = Queensland | ||
81 | |||
82 | localityName = Locality Name (eg, city) | ||
83 | |||
84 | organizationName = Organization Name (eg, company) | ||
85 | organizationName_default = Mincom Pty Ltd | ||
86 | |||
87 | organizationalUnitName = Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) | ||
88 | organizationalUnitName_default = MTR | ||
89 | |||
90 | commonName = Common Name (eg, YOUR name) | ||
91 | commonName_max = 64 | ||
92 | |||
93 | emailAddress = Email Address | ||
94 | emailAddress_max = 40 | ||
95 | |||
96 | # The next section is the attributes section. This is exactly the | ||
97 | # same as for the previous section except that the resulting objects are | ||
98 | # put in the attributes field. | ||
99 | [ req_attr ] | ||
100 | challengePassword = A challenge password | ||
101 | challengePassword_min = 4 | ||
102 | challengePassword_max = 20 | ||
103 | |||
104 | unstructuredName = An optional company name | ||
105 | |||
106 | ---- | ||
107 | Also note that the order that attributes appear in this file is the | ||
108 | order they will be put into the distinguished name. | ||
109 | |||
110 | Once this request has been generated, it can be sent to a CA for | ||
111 | certifying. | ||
112 | |||
113 | ---- | ||
114 | A few quick examples.... | ||
115 | |||
116 | To generate a new request and a new key | ||
117 | req -new | ||
118 | |||
119 | To generate a new request and a 1058 bit key | ||
120 | req -newkey 1058 | ||
121 | |||
122 | To generate a new request using a pre-existing key | ||
123 | req -new -key key.pem | ||
124 | |||
125 | To generate a self signed x509 certificate from a certificate | ||
126 | request using a supplied key, and we want to see the text form of the | ||
127 | output certificate (which we will put in the file selfSign.pem | ||
128 | req -x509 -in req.pem -key key.pem -text -out selfSign.pem | ||
129 | |||
130 | Verify that the signature is correct on a certificate request. | ||
131 | req -verify -in req.pem | ||
132 | |||
133 | Verify that the signature was made using a specified public key. | ||
134 | req -verify -in req.pem -key key.pem | ||
135 | |||
136 | Print the contents of a certificate request | ||
137 | req -text -in req.pem | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsa.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsa.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f260452bc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsa.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ | |||
1 | The RSA encryption and utility routines. | ||
2 | |||
3 | The RSA routines are built on top of a big number library (the BN library). | ||
4 | There are support routines in the X509 library for loading and manipulating | ||
5 | the various objects in the RSA library. When errors are returned, read | ||
6 | about the ERR library for how to access the error codes. | ||
7 | |||
8 | All RSA encryption is done according to the PKCS-1 standard which is | ||
9 | compatible with PEM and RSAref. This means that any values being encrypted | ||
10 | must be less than the size of the modulus in bytes, minus 10, bytes long. | ||
11 | |||
12 | This library uses RAND_bytes()() for it's random data, make sure to feed | ||
13 | RAND_seed() with lots of interesting and varied data before using these | ||
14 | routines. | ||
15 | |||
16 | The RSA library has one specific data type, the RSA structure. | ||
17 | It is composed of 8 BIGNUM variables (see the BN library for details) and | ||
18 | can hold either a private RSA key or a public RSA key. | ||
19 | Some RSA libraries have different structures for public and private keys, I | ||
20 | don't. For my libraries, a public key is determined by the fact that the | ||
21 | RSA->d value is NULL. These routines will operate on any size RSA keys. | ||
22 | While I'm sure 4096 bit keys are very very secure, they take a lot longer | ||
23 | to process that 1024 bit keys :-). | ||
24 | |||
25 | The function in the RSA library are as follows. | ||
26 | |||
27 | RSA *RSA_new(); | ||
28 | This function creates a new RSA object. The sub-fields of the RSA | ||
29 | type are also malloced so you should always use this routine to | ||
30 | create RSA variables. | ||
31 | |||
32 | void RSA_free( | ||
33 | RSA *rsa); | ||
34 | This function 'frees' an RSA structure. This routine should always | ||
35 | be used to free the RSA structure since it will also 'free' any | ||
36 | sub-fields of the RSA type that need freeing. | ||
37 | |||
38 | int RSA_size( | ||
39 | RSA *rsa); | ||
40 | This function returns the size of the RSA modulus in bytes. Why do | ||
41 | I need this you may ask, well the reason is that when you encrypt | ||
42 | with RSA, the output string will be the size of the RSA modulus. | ||
43 | So the output for the RSA_encrypt and the input for the RSA_decrypt | ||
44 | routines need to be RSA_size() bytes long, because this is how many | ||
45 | bytes are expected. | ||
46 | |||
47 | For the following 4 RSA encryption routines, it should be noted that | ||
48 | RSA_private_decrypt() should be used on the output from | ||
49 | RSA_public_encrypt() and RSA_public_decrypt() should be used on | ||
50 | the output from RSA_private_encrypt(). | ||
51 | |||
52 | int RSA_public_encrypt( | ||
53 | int from_len; | ||
54 | unsigned char *from | ||
55 | unsigned char *to | ||
56 | RSA *rsa); | ||
57 | This function implements RSA public encryption, the rsa variable | ||
58 | should be a public key (but can be a private key). 'from_len' | ||
59 | bytes taken from 'from' and encrypted and put into 'to'. 'to' needs | ||
60 | to be at least RSA_size(rsa) bytes long. The number of bytes | ||
61 | written into 'to' is returned. -1 is returned on an error. The | ||
62 | operation performed is | ||
63 | to = from^rsa->e mod rsa->n. | ||
64 | |||
65 | int RSA_private_encrypt( | ||
66 | int from_len; | ||
67 | unsigned char *from | ||
68 | unsigned char *to | ||
69 | RSA *rsa); | ||
70 | This function implements RSA private encryption, the rsa variable | ||
71 | should be a private key. 'from_len' bytes taken from | ||
72 | 'from' and encrypted and put into 'to'. 'to' needs | ||
73 | to be at least RSA_size(rsa) bytes long. The number of bytes | ||
74 | written into 'to' is returned. -1 is returned on an error. The | ||
75 | operation performed is | ||
76 | to = from^rsa->d mod rsa->n. | ||
77 | |||
78 | int RSA_public_decrypt( | ||
79 | int from_len; | ||
80 | unsigned char *from | ||
81 | unsigned char *to | ||
82 | RSA *rsa); | ||
83 | This function implements RSA public decryption, the rsa variable | ||
84 | should be a public key (but can be a private key). 'from_len' | ||
85 | bytes are taken from 'from' and decrypted. The decrypted data is | ||
86 | put into 'to'. The number of bytes encrypted is returned. -1 is | ||
87 | returned to indicate an error. The operation performed is | ||
88 | to = from^rsa->e mod rsa->n. | ||
89 | |||
90 | int RSA_private_decrypt( | ||
91 | int from_len; | ||
92 | unsigned char *from | ||
93 | unsigned char *to | ||
94 | RSA *rsa); | ||
95 | This function implements RSA private decryption, the rsa variable | ||
96 | should be a private key. 'from_len' bytes are taken | ||
97 | from 'from' and decrypted. The decrypted data is | ||
98 | put into 'to'. The number of bytes encrypted is returned. -1 is | ||
99 | returned to indicate an error. The operation performed is | ||
100 | to = from^rsa->d mod rsa->n. | ||
101 | |||
102 | int RSA_mod_exp( | ||
103 | BIGNUM *n; | ||
104 | BIGNUM *p; | ||
105 | RSA *rsa); | ||
106 | Normally you will never use this routine. | ||
107 | This is really an internal function which is called by | ||
108 | RSA_private_encrypt() and RSA_private_decrypt(). It performs | ||
109 | n=n^p mod rsa->n except that it uses the 5 extra variables in the | ||
110 | RSA structure to make this more efficient. | ||
111 | |||
112 | RSA *RSA_generate_key( | ||
113 | int bits; | ||
114 | unsigned long e; | ||
115 | void (*callback)(); | ||
116 | char *cb_arg; | ||
117 | This routine is used to generate RSA private keys. It takes | ||
118 | quite a period of time to run and should only be used to | ||
119 | generate initial private keys that should then be stored | ||
120 | for later use. The passed callback function | ||
121 | will be called periodically so that feedback can be given | ||
122 | as to how this function is progressing. | ||
123 | 'bits' is the length desired for the modulus, so it would be 1024 | ||
124 | to generate a 1024 bit private key. | ||
125 | 'e' is the value to use for the public exponent 'e'. Traditionally | ||
126 | it is set to either 3 or 0x10001. | ||
127 | The callback function (if not NULL) is called in the following | ||
128 | situations. | ||
129 | when we have generated a suspected prime number to test, | ||
130 | callback(0,num1++,cb_arg). When it passes a prime number test, | ||
131 | callback(1,num2++,cb_arg). When it is rejected as one of | ||
132 | the 2 primes required due to gcd(prime,e value) != 0, | ||
133 | callback(2,num3++,cb_arg). When finally accepted as one | ||
134 | of the 2 primes, callback(3,num4++,cb_arg). | ||
135 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsaref.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsaref.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0505b76f76 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/rsaref.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ | |||
1 | This package can be compiled to use the RSAref library. | ||
2 | This library is not allowed outside of the USA but inside the USA it is | ||
3 | claimed by RSA to be the only RSA public key library that can be used | ||
4 | besides BSAFE.. | ||
5 | |||
6 | There are 2 files, rsaref/rsaref.c and rsaref/rsaref.h that contain the glue | ||
7 | code to use RSAref. These files were written by looking at the PGP | ||
8 | source code and seeing which routines it used to access RSAref. | ||
9 | I have also been sent by some-one a copy of the RSAref header file that | ||
10 | contains the library error codes. | ||
11 | |||
12 | [ Jun 1996 update - I have recently gotten hold of RSAref 2.0 from | ||
13 | South Africa and have been doing some performace tests. ] | ||
14 | |||
15 | They have now been tested against the recently announced RSAEURO | ||
16 | library. | ||
17 | |||
18 | There are 2 ways to use SSLeay and RSAref. First, to build so that | ||
19 | the programs must be linked with RSAref, add '-DRSAref' to CFLAG in the top | ||
20 | level makefile and -lrsaref (or where ever you are keeping RSAref) to | ||
21 | EX_LIBS. | ||
22 | |||
23 | To build a makefile via util/mk1mf.pl to do this, use the 'rsaref' option. | ||
24 | |||
25 | The second method is to build as per normal and link applications with | ||
26 | the RSAglue library. The correct library order would be | ||
27 | cc -o cmd cmd.o -lssl -lRSAglue -lcrypto -lrsaref -ldes | ||
28 | The RSAglue library is built in the rsa directory and is NOT | ||
29 | automatically installed. | ||
30 | |||
31 | Be warned that the RSAEURO library, that is claimed to be compatible | ||
32 | with RSAref contains a different value for the maximum number of bits | ||
33 | supported. This changes structure sizes and so if you are using | ||
34 | RSAEURO, change the value of RSAref_MAX_BITS in rsa/rsaref.h | ||
35 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/s_mult.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/s_mult.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..726085bc57 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/s_mult.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ | |||
1 | s_mult is a test program I hacked up on a Sunday for testing non-blocking | ||
2 | IO. It has a select loop at it's centre that handles multiple readers | ||
3 | and writers. | ||
4 | |||
5 | Try the following command | ||
6 | ssleay s_mult -echo -nbio -ssl -v | ||
7 | echo - sends any sent text back to the sender | ||
8 | nbio - turns on non-blocking IO | ||
9 | ssl - accept SSL connections, default is normal text | ||
10 | v - print lots | ||
11 | type Q<cr> to quit | ||
12 | |||
13 | In another window, run the following | ||
14 | ssleay s_client -pause </etc/termcap | ||
15 | |||
16 | The pause option puts in a 1 second pause in each read(2)/write(2) call | ||
17 | so the other end will have read()s fail. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/session.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/session.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ffccb0306e --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/session.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ | |||
1 | I have just checked over and re-worked the session stuff. | ||
2 | The following brief example will ignore all setup information to do with | ||
3 | authentication. | ||
4 | |||
5 | Things operate as follows. | ||
6 | |||
7 | The SSL environment has a 'context', a SSL_CTX structure. This holds the | ||
8 | cached SSL_SESSIONS (which can be reused) and the certificate lookup | ||
9 | information. Each SSL structure needs to be associated with a SSL_CTX. | ||
10 | Normally only one SSL_CTX structure is needed per program. | ||
11 | |||
12 | SSL_CTX *SSL_CTX_new(void ); | ||
13 | void SSL_CTX_free(SSL_CTX *); | ||
14 | These 2 functions create and destroy SSL_CTX structures | ||
15 | |||
16 | The SSL_CTX has a session_cache_mode which is by default, | ||
17 | in SSL_SESS_CACHE_SERVER mode. What this means is that the library | ||
18 | will automatically add new session-id's to the cache apon sucsessful | ||
19 | SSL_accept() calls. | ||
20 | If SSL_SESS_CACHE_CLIENT is set, then client certificates are also added | ||
21 | to the cache. | ||
22 | SSL_set_session_cache_mode(ctx,mode) will set the 'mode' and | ||
23 | SSL_get_session_cache_mode(ctx) will get the cache 'mode'. | ||
24 | The modes can be | ||
25 | SSL_SESS_CACHE_OFF - no caching | ||
26 | SSL_SESS_CACHE_CLIENT - only SSL_connect() | ||
27 | SSL_SESS_CACHE_SERVER - only SSL_accept() | ||
28 | SSL_SESS_NO_CACHE_BOTH - Either SSL_accept() or SSL_connect(). | ||
29 | If SSL_SESS_CACHE_NO_AUTO_CLEAR is set, old timed out sessions are | ||
30 | not automatically removed each 255, SSL_connect()s or SSL_accept()s. | ||
31 | |||
32 | By default, apon every 255 successful SSL_connect() or SSL_accept()s, | ||
33 | the cache is flush. Please note that this could be expensive on | ||
34 | a heavily loaded SSL server, in which case, turn this off and | ||
35 | clear the cache of old entries 'manually' (with one of the functions | ||
36 | listed below) every few hours. Perhaps I should up this number, it is hard | ||
37 | to say. Remember, the '255' new calls is just a mechanims to get called | ||
38 | every now and then, in theory at most 255 new session-id's will have been | ||
39 | added but if 100 are added every minute, you would still have | ||
40 | 500 in the cache before any would start being flushed (assuming a 3 minute | ||
41 | timeout).. | ||
42 | |||
43 | int SSL_CTX_sess_hits(SSL_CTX *ctx); | ||
44 | int SSL_CTX_sess_misses(SSL_CTX *ctx); | ||
45 | int SSL_CTX_sess_timeouts(SSL_CTX *ctx); | ||
46 | These 3 functions return statistics about the SSL_CTX. These 3 are the | ||
47 | number of session id reuses. hits is the number of reuses, misses are the | ||
48 | number of lookups that failed, and timeouts is the number of cached | ||
49 | entries ignored because they had timeouted. | ||
50 | |||
51 | ctx->new_session_cb is a function pointer to a function of type | ||
52 | int new_session_callback(SSL *ssl,SSL_SESSION *new); | ||
53 | This function, if set in the SSL_CTX structure is called whenever a new | ||
54 | SSL_SESSION is added to the cache. If the callback returns non-zero, it | ||
55 | means that the application will have to do a SSL_SESSION_free() | ||
56 | on the structure (this is | ||
57 | to do with the cache keeping the reference counts correct, without the | ||
58 | application needing to know about it. | ||
59 | The 'active' parameter is the current SSL session for which this connection | ||
60 | was created. | ||
61 | |||
62 | void SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,int (*cb)()); | ||
63 | to set the callback, | ||
64 | int (*cb)() SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx) | ||
65 | to get the callback. | ||
66 | |||
67 | If the 'get session' callback is set, when a session id is looked up and | ||
68 | it is not in the session-id cache, this callback is called. The callback is | ||
69 | of the form | ||
70 | SSL_SESSION *get_session_callback(unsigned char *sess_id,int sess_id_len, | ||
71 | int *copy); | ||
72 | |||
73 | The get_session_callback is intended to return null if no session id is found. | ||
74 | The reference count on the SSL_SESSION in incremented by the SSL library, | ||
75 | if copy is 1. Otherwise, the reference count is not modified. | ||
76 | |||
77 | void SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(ctx,cb) sets the callback and | ||
78 | int (*cb)()SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb(ctx) returns the callback. | ||
79 | |||
80 | These callbacks are basically indended to be used by processes to | ||
81 | send their session-id's to other processes. I currently have not implemented | ||
82 | non-blocking semantics for these callbacks, it is upto the appication | ||
83 | to make the callbacks effiecent if they require blocking (perhaps | ||
84 | by 'saving' them and then 'posting them' when control returns from | ||
85 | the SSL_accept(). | ||
86 | |||
87 | LHASH *SSL_CTX_sessions(SSL_CTX *ctx) | ||
88 | This returns the session cache. The lhash strucutre can be accessed for | ||
89 | statistics about the cache. | ||
90 | |||
91 | void lh_stats(LHASH *lh, FILE *out); | ||
92 | void lh_node_stats(LHASH *lh, FILE *out); | ||
93 | void lh_node_usage_stats(LHASH *lh, FILE *out); | ||
94 | |||
95 | can be used to print details about it's activity and current state. | ||
96 | You can also delve directly into the lhash structure for 14 different | ||
97 | counters that are kept against the structure. When I wrote the lhash library, | ||
98 | I was interested in gathering statistics :-). | ||
99 | Have a read of doc/lhash.doc in the SSLeay distribution area for more details | ||
100 | on the lhash library. | ||
101 | |||
102 | Now as mentioned ealier, when a SSL is created, it needs a SSL_CTX. | ||
103 | SSL * SSL_new(SSL_CTX *); | ||
104 | |||
105 | This stores a session. A session is secret information shared between 2 | ||
106 | SSL contexts. It will only be created if both ends of the connection have | ||
107 | authenticated their peer to their satisfaction. It basically contains | ||
108 | the information required to use a particular secret key cipher. | ||
109 | |||
110 | To retrieve the SSL_CTX being used by a SSL, | ||
111 | SSL_CTX *SSL_get_SSL_CTX(SSL *s); | ||
112 | |||
113 | Now when a SSL session is established between to programs, the 'session' | ||
114 | information that is cached in the SSL_CTX can me manipulated by the | ||
115 | following functions. | ||
116 | int SSL_set_session(SSL *s, SSL_SESSION *session); | ||
117 | This will set the SSL_SESSION to use for the next SSL_connect(). If you use | ||
118 | this function on an already 'open' established SSL connection, 'bad things | ||
119 | will happen'. This function is meaning-less when used on a ssl strucutre | ||
120 | that is just about to be used in a SSL_accept() call since the | ||
121 | SSL_accept() will either create a new session or retrieve one from the | ||
122 | cache. | ||
123 | |||
124 | SSL_SESSION *SSL_get_session(SSL *s); | ||
125 | This will return the SSL_SESSION for the current SSL, NULL if there is | ||
126 | no session associated with the SSL structure. | ||
127 | |||
128 | The SSL sessions are kept in the SSL_CTX in a hash table, to remove a | ||
129 | session | ||
130 | void SSL_CTX_remove_session(SSL_CTX *,SSL_SESSION *c); | ||
131 | and to add one | ||
132 | int SSL_CTX_add_session(SSL_CTX *s, SSL_SESSION *c); | ||
133 | SSL_CTX_add_session() returns 1 if the session was already in the cache (so it | ||
134 | was not added). | ||
135 | Whenever a new session is created via SSL_connect()/SSL_accept(), | ||
136 | they are automatically added to the cache, depending on the session_cache_mode | ||
137 | settings. SSL_set_session() | ||
138 | does not add it to the cache. Just call SSL_CTX_add_session() if you do want the | ||
139 | session added. For a 'client' this would not normally be the case. | ||
140 | SSL_CTX_add_session() is not normally ever used, except for doing 'evil' things | ||
141 | which the next 2 funtions help you do. | ||
142 | |||
143 | int i2d_SSL_SESSION(SSL_SESSION *in,unsigned char **pp); | ||
144 | SSL_SESSION *d2i_SSL_SESSION(SSL_SESSION **a,unsigned char **pp,long length); | ||
145 | These 2 functions are in the standard ASN1 library form and can be used to | ||
146 | load and save to a byte format, the SSL_SESSION structure. | ||
147 | With these functions, you can save and read these structures to a files or | ||
148 | arbitary byte string. | ||
149 | The PEM_write_SSL_SESSION(fp,x) and PEM_read_SSL_SESSION(fp,x,cb) will | ||
150 | write to a file pointer in base64 encoding. | ||
151 | |||
152 | What you can do with this, is pass session information between separate | ||
153 | processes. Please note, that you will probably also need to modify the | ||
154 | timeout information on the SSL_SESSIONs. | ||
155 | |||
156 | long SSL_get_time(SSL_SESSION *s) | ||
157 | will return the 'time' that the session | ||
158 | was loaded. The timeout is relative to this time. This information is | ||
159 | saved when the SSL_SESSION is converted to binarary but it is stored | ||
160 | in as a unix long, which is rather OS dependant, but easy to convert back. | ||
161 | |||
162 | long SSL_set_time(SSL_SESSION *s,long t) will set the above mentioned time. | ||
163 | The time value is just the value returned from time(3), and should really | ||
164 | be defined by be to be time_t. | ||
165 | |||
166 | long SSL_get_timeout(SSL_SESSION *s); | ||
167 | long SSL_set_timeout(SSL_SESSION *s,long t); | ||
168 | These 2 retrieve and set the timeout which is just a number of secconds | ||
169 | from the 'SSL_get_time()' value. When this time period has elapesed, | ||
170 | the session will no longer be in the cache (well it will actually be removed | ||
171 | the next time it is attempted to be retrieved, so you could 'bump' | ||
172 | the timeout so it remains valid). | ||
173 | The 'time' and 'timeout' are set on a session when it is created, not reset | ||
174 | each time it is reused. If you did wish to 'bump it', just after establishing | ||
175 | a connection, do a | ||
176 | SSL_set_time(ssl,time(NULL)); | ||
177 | |||
178 | You can also use | ||
179 | SSL_CTX_set_timeout(SSL_CTX *ctx,unsigned long t) and | ||
180 | SSL_CTX_get_timeout(SSL_CTX *ctx) to manipulate the default timeouts for | ||
181 | all SSL connections created against a SSL_CTX. If you set a timeout in | ||
182 | an SSL_CTX, all new SSL's created will inherit the timeout. It can be over | ||
183 | written by the SSL_set_timeout(SSL *s,unsigned long t) function call. | ||
184 | If you 'set' the timeout back to 0, the system default will be used. | ||
185 | |||
186 | SSL_SESSION *SSL_SESSION_new(); | ||
187 | void SSL_SESSION_free(SSL_SESSION *ses); | ||
188 | These 2 functions are used to create and dispose of SSL_SESSION functions. | ||
189 | You should not ever normally need to use them unless you are using | ||
190 | i2d_SSL_SESSION() and/or d2i_SSL_SESSION(). If you 'load' a SSL_SESSION | ||
191 | via d2i_SSL_SESSION(), you will need to SSL_SESSION_free() it. | ||
192 | Both SSL_set_session() and SSL_CTX_add_session() will 'take copies' of the | ||
193 | structure (via reference counts) when it is passed to them. | ||
194 | |||
195 | SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(ctx,time); | ||
196 | The first function will clear all sessions from the cache, which have expired | ||
197 | relative to 'time' (which could just be time(NULL)). | ||
198 | |||
199 | SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(ctx,0); | ||
200 | This is a special case that clears everything. | ||
201 | |||
202 | As a final comment, a 'session' is not enough to establish a new | ||
203 | connection. If a session has timed out, a certificate and private key | ||
204 | need to have been associated with the SSL structure. | ||
205 | SSL_copy_session_id(SSL *to,SSL *from); will copy not only the session | ||
206 | strucutre but also the private key and certificate associated with | ||
207 | 'from'. | ||
208 | |||
209 | EXAMPLES. | ||
210 | |||
211 | So lets play at being a wierd SSL server. | ||
212 | |||
213 | /* setup a context */ | ||
214 | ctx=SSL_CTX_new(); | ||
215 | |||
216 | /* Lets load some session from binary into the cache, why one would do | ||
217 | * this is not toally clear, but passing between programs does make sense | ||
218 | * Perhaps you are using 4096 bit keys and are happy to keep them | ||
219 | * valid for a week, to avoid the RSA overhead of 15 seconds, I'm not toally | ||
220 | * sure, perhaps this is a process called from an SSL inetd and this is being | ||
221 | * passed to the application. */ | ||
222 | session=d2i_SSL_SESSION(....) | ||
223 | SSL_CTX_add_session(ctx,session); | ||
224 | |||
225 | /* Lets even add a session from a file */ | ||
226 | session=PEM_read_SSL_SESSION(....) | ||
227 | SSL_CTX_add_session(ctx,session); | ||
228 | |||
229 | /* create a new SSL structure */ | ||
230 | ssl=SSL_new(ctx); | ||
231 | |||
232 | /* At this point we want to be able to 'create' new session if | ||
233 | * required, so we need a certificate and RSAkey. */ | ||
234 | SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_file(ssl,...) | ||
235 | SSL_use_certificate_file(ssl,...) | ||
236 | |||
237 | /* Now since we are a server, it make little sence to load a session against | ||
238 | * the ssl strucutre since a SSL_accept() will either create a new session or | ||
239 | * grab an existing one from the cache. */ | ||
240 | |||
241 | /* grab a socket descriptor */ | ||
242 | fd=accept(...); | ||
243 | |||
244 | /* associated it with the ssl strucutre */ | ||
245 | SSL_set_fd(ssl,fd); | ||
246 | |||
247 | SSL_accept(ssl); /* 'do' SSL using out cert and RSA key */ | ||
248 | |||
249 | /* Lets print out the session details or lets save it to a file, | ||
250 | * perhaps with a secret key cipher, so that we can pass it to the FBI | ||
251 | * when they want to decode the session :-). While we have RSA | ||
252 | * this does not matter much but when I do SSLv3, this will allow a mechanism | ||
253 | * for the server/client to record the information needed to decode | ||
254 | * the traffic that went over the wire, even when using Diffie-Hellman */ | ||
255 | PEM_write_SSL_SESSION(SSL_get_session(ssl),stdout,....) | ||
256 | |||
257 | Lets 'connect' back to the caller using the same session id. | ||
258 | |||
259 | ssl2=SSL_new(ctx); | ||
260 | fd2=connect(them); | ||
261 | SSL_set_fd(ssl2,fd2); | ||
262 | SSL_set_session(ssl2,SSL_get_session(ssl)); | ||
263 | SSL_connect(ssl2); | ||
264 | |||
265 | /* what the hell, lets accept no more connections using this session */ | ||
266 | SSL_CTX_remove_session(SSL_get_SSL_CTX(ssl),SSL_get_session(ssl)); | ||
267 | |||
268 | /* we could have just as easily used ssl2 since they both are using the | ||
269 | * same session. | ||
270 | * You will note that both ssl and ssl2 are still using the session, and | ||
271 | * the SSL_SESSION structure will be free()ed when both ssl and ssl2 | ||
272 | * finish using the session. Also note that you could continue to initiate | ||
273 | * connections using this session by doing SSL_get_session(ssl) to get the | ||
274 | * existing session, but SSL_accept() will not be able to find it to | ||
275 | * use for incoming connections. | ||
276 | * Of corse, the session will timeout at the far end and it will no | ||
277 | * longer be accepted after a while. The time and timeout are ignored except | ||
278 | * by SSL_accept(). */ | ||
279 | |||
280 | /* Since we have had our server running for 10 weeks, and memory is getting | ||
281 | * short, perhaps we should clear the session cache to remove those | ||
282 | * 100000 session entries that have expired. Some may consider this | ||
283 | * a memory leak :-) */ | ||
284 | |||
285 | SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(ctx,time(NULL)); | ||
286 | |||
287 | /* Ok, after a bit more time we wish to flush all sessions from the cache | ||
288 | * so that all new connections will be authenticated and incure the | ||
289 | * public key operation overhead */ | ||
290 | |||
291 | SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(ctx,0); | ||
292 | |||
293 | /* As a final note, to copy everything to do with a SSL, use */ | ||
294 | SSL_copy_session_id(SSL *to,SSL *from); | ||
295 | /* as this also copies the certificate and RSA key so new session can | ||
296 | * be established using the same details */ | ||
297 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/sha.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/sha.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..895fa182ed --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/sha.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ | |||
1 | The SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) library. | ||
2 | SHA is a message digest algorithm that can be used to condense an arbitrary | ||
3 | length message down to a 20 byte hash. The functions all need to be passed | ||
4 | a SHA_CTX which is used to hold the SHA context during multiple SHA_Update() | ||
5 | function calls. The normal method of use for this library is as follows | ||
6 | This library contains both SHA and SHA-1 digest algorithms. SHA-1 is | ||
7 | an update to SHA (which should really be called SHA-0 now) which | ||
8 | tweaks the algorithm slightly. The SHA-1 algorithm is used by simply | ||
9 | using SHA1_Init(), SHA1_Update(), SHA1_Final() and SHA1() instead of the | ||
10 | SHA*() calls | ||
11 | |||
12 | SHA_Init(...); | ||
13 | SHA_Update(...); | ||
14 | ... | ||
15 | SHA_Update(...); | ||
16 | SHA_Final(...); | ||
17 | |||
18 | This library requires the inclusion of 'sha.h'. | ||
19 | |||
20 | The functions are as follows: | ||
21 | |||
22 | void SHA_Init( | ||
23 | SHA_CTX *c); | ||
24 | This function needs to be called to initiate a SHA_CTX structure for | ||
25 | use. | ||
26 | |||
27 | void SHA_Update( | ||
28 | SHA_CTX *c; | ||
29 | unsigned char *data; | ||
30 | unsigned long len); | ||
31 | This updates the message digest context being generated with 'len' | ||
32 | bytes from the 'data' pointer. The number of bytes can be any | ||
33 | length. | ||
34 | |||
35 | void SHA_Final( | ||
36 | unsigned char *md; | ||
37 | SHA_CTX *c; | ||
38 | This function is called when a message digest of the data digested | ||
39 | with SHA_Update() is wanted. The message digest is put in the 'md' | ||
40 | array and is SHA_DIGEST_LENGTH (20) bytes long. | ||
41 | |||
42 | unsigned char *SHA( | ||
43 | unsigned char *d; | ||
44 | unsigned long n; | ||
45 | unsigned char *md; | ||
46 | This function performs a SHA_Init(), followed by a SHA_Update() | ||
47 | followed by a SHA_Final() (using a local SHA_CTX). | ||
48 | The resulting digest is put into 'md' if it is not NULL. | ||
49 | Regardless of the value of 'md', the message | ||
50 | digest is returned from the function. If 'md' was NULL, the message | ||
51 | digest returned is being stored in a static structure. | ||
52 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/speed.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/speed.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11dfa85f08 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/speed.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ | |||
1 | To get an idea of the performance of this library, use | ||
2 | ssleay speed | ||
3 | |||
4 | perl util/sp-diff.pl file1 file2 | ||
5 | |||
6 | will print out the relative differences between the 2 files which are | ||
7 | expected to be the output from the speed program. | ||
8 | |||
9 | The performace of the library is very dependant on the Compiler | ||
10 | quality and various flags used to build. | ||
11 | |||
12 | --- | ||
13 | |||
14 | These are some numbers I did comparing RSAref and SSLeay on a Pentium 100. | ||
15 | [ These numbers are all out of date, as of SSL - 0.6.1 the RSA | ||
16 | operations are about 2 times faster, so check the version number ] | ||
17 | |||
18 | RSA performance. | ||
19 | |||
20 | SSLeay 0.6.0 | ||
21 | Pentium 100, 32meg, Windows NT Workstation 3.51 | ||
22 | linux - gcc v 2.7.0 -O3 -fomit-frame-pointer -m486 | ||
23 | and | ||
24 | Windows NT - Windows NT 3.51 - Visual C++ 4.1 - 586 code + 32bit assember | ||
25 | Windows 3.1 - Windows NT 3.51 - Visual C++ 1.52c - 286 code + 32bit assember | ||
26 | NT Dos Shell- Windows NT 3.51 - Visual C++ 1.52c - 286 code + 16bit assember | ||
27 | |||
28 | Times are how long it takes to do an RSA private key operation. | ||
29 | |||
30 | 512bits 1024bits | ||
31 | ------------------------------- | ||
32 | SSLeay NT dll 0.042s 0.202s see above | ||
33 | SSLeay linux 0.046s 0.218s Assember inner loops (normal build) | ||
34 | SSLeay linux 0.067s 0.380s Pure C code with BN_LLONG defined | ||
35 | SSLeay W3.1 dll 0.108s 0.478s see above | ||
36 | SSLeay linux 0.109s 0.713s C without BN_LLONG. | ||
37 | RSAref2.0 linux 0.149s 0.936s | ||
38 | SSLeay MS-DOS 0.197s 1.049s see above | ||
39 | |||
40 | 486DX66, 32meg, Windows NT Server 3.51 | ||
41 | 512bits 1024bits | ||
42 | ------------------------------- | ||
43 | SSLeay NT dll 0.084s 0.495s <- SSLeay 0.6.3 | ||
44 | SSLeay NT dll 0.154s 0.882s | ||
45 | SSLeay W3.1 dll 0.335s 1.538s | ||
46 | SSLeay MS-DOS 0.490s 2.790s | ||
47 | |||
48 | What I find cute is that I'm still faster than RSAref when using standard C, | ||
49 | without using the 'long long' data type :-), %35 faster for 512bit and we | ||
50 | scale up to 3.2 times faster for the 'default linux' build. I should mention | ||
51 | that people should 'try' to use either x86-lnx.s (elf), x86-lnxa.s or | ||
52 | x86-sol.s for any x86 based unix they are building on. The only problems | ||
53 | with be with syntax but the performance gain is quite large, especially for | ||
54 | servers. The code is very simple, you just need to modify the 'header'. | ||
55 | |||
56 | The message is, if you are stuck using RSAref, the RSA performance will be | ||
57 | bad. Considering the code was compiled for a pentium, the 486DX66 number | ||
58 | would indicate 'Use RSAref and turn you Pentium 100 into a 486DX66' :-). | ||
59 | [ As of verson 0.6.1, it would be correct to say 'turn you pentium 100 | ||
60 | into a 486DX33' :-) ] | ||
61 | |||
62 | I won't tell people if the DLL's are using RSAref or my stuff if no-one | ||
63 | asks :-). | ||
64 | |||
65 | eric | ||
66 | |||
67 | PS while I know I could speed things up further, I will probably not do | ||
68 | so due to the effort involved. I did do some timings on the | ||
69 | SSLeay bignum format -> RSAref number format conversion that occurs | ||
70 | each time RSAref is used by SSLeay, and the numbers are trivial. | ||
71 | 0.00012s a call for 512bit vs 0.149s for the time spent in the function. | ||
72 | 0.00018s for 1024bit vs 0.938s. Insignificant. | ||
73 | So the 'way to go', to support faster RSA libraries, if people are keen, | ||
74 | is to write 'glue' code in a similar way that I do for RSAref and send it | ||
75 | to me :-). | ||
76 | My base library still has the advantage of being able to operate on | ||
77 | any size numbers, and is not that far from the performance from the | ||
78 | leaders in the field. (-%30?) | ||
79 | [ Well as of 0.6.1 I am now the leader in the filed on x86 (we at | ||
80 | least very close :-) ] | ||
81 | |||
82 | I suppose I should also mention some other numbers RSAref numbers, again | ||
83 | on my Pentium. | ||
84 | DES CBC EDE-DES MD5 | ||
85 | RSAref linux 830k/s 302k/s 4390k/s | ||
86 | SSLeay linux 855k/s 319k/s 10025k/s | ||
87 | SSLeay NT 1158k/s 410k/s 10470k/s | ||
88 | SSLeay w31 378k/s 143k/s 2383k/s (fully 16bit) | ||
89 | |||
90 | Got to admit that Visual C++ 4.[01] is a damn fine compiler :-) | ||
91 | -- | ||
92 | Eric Young | BOOL is tri-state according to Bill Gates. | ||
93 | AARNet: eay@cryptsoft.com | RTFM Win32 GetMessage(). | ||
94 | |||
95 | |||
96 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl-ciph.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl-ciph.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33a7e41f0e --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl-ciph.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ | |||
1 | This is a quick high level summery of how things work now. | ||
2 | |||
3 | Each SSLv2 and SSLv3 cipher is composed of 4 major attributes plus a few extra | ||
4 | minor ones. | ||
5 | |||
6 | They are 'The key exchange algorithm', which is RSA for SSLv2 but can also | ||
7 | be Diffle-Hellman for SSLv3. | ||
8 | |||
9 | An 'Authenticion algorithm', which can be RSA, Diffle-Helman, DSS or | ||
10 | none. | ||
11 | |||
12 | The cipher | ||
13 | |||
14 | The MAC digest. | ||
15 | |||
16 | A cipher can also be an export cipher and is either an SSLv2 or a | ||
17 | SSLv3 ciphers. | ||
18 | |||
19 | To specify which ciphers to use, one can either specify all the ciphers, | ||
20 | one at a time, or use 'aliases' to specify the preference and order for | ||
21 | the ciphers. | ||
22 | |||
23 | There are a large number of aliases, but the most importaint are | ||
24 | kRSA, kDHr, kDHd and kEDH for key exchange types. | ||
25 | |||
26 | aRSA, aDSS, aNULL and aDH for authentication | ||
27 | DES, 3DES, RC4, RC2, IDEA and eNULL for ciphers | ||
28 | MD5, SHA0 and SHA1 digests | ||
29 | |||
30 | Now where this becomes interesting is that these can be put together to | ||
31 | specify the order and ciphers you wish to use. | ||
32 | |||
33 | To speed this up there are also aliases for certian groups of ciphers. | ||
34 | The main ones are | ||
35 | SSLv2 - all SSLv2 ciphers | ||
36 | SSLv3 - all SSLv3 ciphers | ||
37 | EXP - all export ciphers | ||
38 | LOW - all low strngth ciphers (no export ciphers, normally single DES) | ||
39 | MEDIUM - 128 bit encryption | ||
40 | HIGH - Triple DES | ||
41 | |||
42 | These aliases can be joined in a : separated list which specifies to | ||
43 | add ciphers, move them to the current location and delete them. | ||
44 | |||
45 | A simpler way to look at all of this is to use the 'ssleay ciphers -v' command. | ||
46 | The default library cipher spec is | ||
47 | !ADH:RC4+RSA:HIGH:MEDIUM:LOW:EXP:+SSLv2:+EXP | ||
48 | which means, first, remove from consideration any ciphers that do not | ||
49 | authenticate. Next up, use ciphers using RC4 and RSA. Next include the HIGH, | ||
50 | MEDIUM and the LOW security ciphers. Finish up by adding all the export | ||
51 | ciphers on the end, then 'pull' all the SSLv2 and export ciphers to | ||
52 | the end of the list. | ||
53 | |||
54 | The results are | ||
55 | $ ssleay ciphers -v '!ADH:RC4+RSA:HIGH:MEDIUM:LOW:EXP:+SSLv2:+EXP' | ||
56 | |||
57 | RC4-SHA SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=RC4(128) Mac=SHA1 | ||
58 | RC4-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=RC4(128) Mac=MD5 | ||
59 | EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=RSA Enc=3DES(168) Mac=SHA1 | ||
60 | EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=DSS Enc=3DES(168) Mac=SHA1 | ||
61 | DES-CBC3-SHA SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=3DES(168) Mac=SHA1 | ||
62 | IDEA-CBC-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=IDEA(128) Mac=SHA1 | ||
63 | EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=RSA Enc=DES(56) Mac=SHA1 | ||
64 | EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=DSS Enc=DES(56) Mac=SHA1 | ||
65 | DES-CBC-SHA SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=DES(56) Mac=SHA1 | ||
66 | DES-CBC3-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=3DES(168) Mac=MD5 | ||
67 | DES-CBC-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=DES(56) Mac=MD5 | ||
68 | IDEA-CBC-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=IDEA(128) Mac=MD5 | ||
69 | RC2-CBC-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=RC2(128) Mac=MD5 | ||
70 | RC4-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=RC4(128) Mac=MD5 | ||
71 | EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC SSLv3 Kx=DH(512) Au=RSA Enc=DES(40) Mac=SHA1 export | ||
72 | EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH(512) Au=DSS Enc=DES(40) Mac=SHA1 export | ||
73 | EXP-DES-CBC-SHA SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=DES(40) Mac=SHA1 export | ||
74 | EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=RC2(40) Mac=MD5 export | ||
75 | EXP-RC4-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=RC4(40) Mac=MD5 export | ||
76 | EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=RC2(40) Mac=MD5 export | ||
77 | EXP-RC4-MD5 SSLv2 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=RC4(40) Mac=MD5 export | ||
78 | |||
79 | I would recoment people use the 'ssleay ciphers -v "text"' | ||
80 | command to check what they are going to use. | ||
81 | |||
82 | Anyway, I'm falling asleep here so I'll do some more tomorrow. | ||
83 | |||
84 | eric | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1f89cd5db2 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ | |||
1 | SSL_CTX_sessions(SSL_CTX *ctx) - the session-id hash table. | ||
2 | |||
3 | /* Session-id cache stats */ | ||
4 | SSL_CTX_sess_number | ||
5 | SSL_CTX_sess_connect | ||
6 | SSL_CTX_sess_connect_good | ||
7 | SSL_CTX_sess_accept | ||
8 | SSL_CTX_sess_accept_good | ||
9 | SSL_CTX_sess_hits | ||
10 | SSL_CTX_sess_cb_hits | ||
11 | SSL_CTX_sess_misses | ||
12 | SSL_CTX_sess_timeouts | ||
13 | |||
14 | /* Session-id application notification callbacks */ | ||
15 | SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb | ||
16 | SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb | ||
17 | SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb | ||
18 | SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb | ||
19 | |||
20 | /* Session-id cache operation mode */ | ||
21 | SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode | ||
22 | SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode | ||
23 | |||
24 | /* Set default timeout values to use. */ | ||
25 | SSL_CTX_set_timeout | ||
26 | SSL_CTX_get_timeout | ||
27 | |||
28 | /* Global SSL initalisation informational callback */ | ||
29 | SSL_CTX_set_info_callback | ||
30 | SSL_CTX_get_info_callback | ||
31 | SSL_set_info_callback | ||
32 | SSL_get_info_callback | ||
33 | |||
34 | /* If the SSL_accept/SSL_connect returned with -1, these indicate when | ||
35 | * we should re-call *. | ||
36 | SSL_want | ||
37 | SSL_want_nothing | ||
38 | SSL_want_read | ||
39 | SSL_want_write | ||
40 | SSL_want_x509_lookup | ||
41 | |||
42 | /* Where we are in SSL initalisation, used in non-blocking, perhaps | ||
43 | * have a look at ssl/bio_ssl.c */ | ||
44 | SSL_state | ||
45 | SSL_is_init_finished | ||
46 | SSL_in_init | ||
47 | SSL_in_connect_init | ||
48 | SSL_in_accept_init | ||
49 | |||
50 | /* Used to set the 'inital' state so SSL_in_connect_init and SSL_in_accept_init | ||
51 | * can be used to work out which function to call. */ | ||
52 | SSL_set_connect_state | ||
53 | SSL_set_accept_state | ||
54 | |||
55 | /* Where to look for certificates for authentication */ | ||
56 | SSL_set_default_verify_paths /* calles SSL_load_verify_locations */ | ||
57 | SSL_load_verify_locations | ||
58 | |||
59 | /* get info from an established connection */ | ||
60 | SSL_get_session | ||
61 | SSL_get_certificate | ||
62 | SSL_get_SSL_CTX | ||
63 | |||
64 | SSL_CTX_new | ||
65 | SSL_CTX_free | ||
66 | SSL_new | ||
67 | SSL_clear | ||
68 | SSL_free | ||
69 | |||
70 | SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list | ||
71 | SSL_get_cipher | ||
72 | SSL_set_cipher_list | ||
73 | SSL_get_cipher_list | ||
74 | SSL_get_shared_ciphers | ||
75 | |||
76 | SSL_accept | ||
77 | SSL_connect | ||
78 | SSL_read | ||
79 | SSL_write | ||
80 | |||
81 | SSL_debug | ||
82 | |||
83 | SSL_get_read_ahead | ||
84 | SSL_set_read_ahead | ||
85 | SSL_set_verify | ||
86 | |||
87 | SSL_pending | ||
88 | |||
89 | SSL_set_fd | ||
90 | SSL_set_rfd | ||
91 | SSL_set_wfd | ||
92 | SSL_set_bio | ||
93 | SSL_get_fd | ||
94 | SSL_get_rbio | ||
95 | SSL_get_wbio | ||
96 | |||
97 | SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey | ||
98 | SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1 | ||
99 | SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_file | ||
100 | SSL_use_PrivateKey | ||
101 | SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1 | ||
102 | SSL_use_PrivateKey_file | ||
103 | SSL_use_certificate | ||
104 | SSL_use_certificate_ASN1 | ||
105 | SSL_use_certificate_file | ||
106 | |||
107 | ERR_load_SSL_strings | ||
108 | SSL_load_error_strings | ||
109 | |||
110 | /* human readable version of the 'state' of the SSL connection. */ | ||
111 | SSL_state_string | ||
112 | SSL_state_string_long | ||
113 | /* These 2 report what kind of IO operation the library was trying to | ||
114 | * perform last. Probably not very usefull. */ | ||
115 | SSL_rstate_string | ||
116 | SSL_rstate_string_long | ||
117 | |||
118 | SSL_get_peer_certificate | ||
119 | |||
120 | SSL_SESSION_new | ||
121 | SSL_SESSION_print_fp | ||
122 | SSL_SESSION_print | ||
123 | SSL_SESSION_free | ||
124 | i2d_SSL_SESSION | ||
125 | d2i_SSL_SESSION | ||
126 | |||
127 | SSL_get_time | ||
128 | SSL_set_time | ||
129 | SSL_get_timeout | ||
130 | SSL_set_timeout | ||
131 | SSL_copy_session_id | ||
132 | SSL_set_session | ||
133 | SSL_CTX_add_session | ||
134 | SSL_CTX_remove_session | ||
135 | SSL_CTX_flush_sessions | ||
136 | |||
137 | BIO_f_ssl | ||
138 | |||
139 | /* used to hold information as to why a certificate verification failed */ | ||
140 | SSL_set_verify_result | ||
141 | SSL_get_verify_result | ||
142 | |||
143 | /* can be used by the application to associate data with an SSL structure. | ||
144 | * It needs to be 'free()ed' by the application */ | ||
145 | SSL_set_app_data | ||
146 | SSL_get_app_data | ||
147 | |||
148 | /* The following all set values that are kept in the SSL_CTX but | ||
149 | * are used as the default values when an SSL session is created. | ||
150 | * They are over writen by the relevent SSL_xxxx functions */ | ||
151 | |||
152 | /* SSL_set_verify */ | ||
153 | void SSL_CTX_set_default_verify | ||
154 | |||
155 | /* This callback, if set, totaly overrides the normal SSLeay verification | ||
156 | * functions and should return 1 on sucesss and 0 on failure */ | ||
157 | void SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback | ||
158 | |||
159 | /* The following are the same as the equivilent SSL_xxx functions. | ||
160 | * Only one copy of this information is kept and if a particular | ||
161 | * SSL structure has a local override, it is totally separate structure. | ||
162 | */ | ||
163 | int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey | ||
164 | int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1 | ||
165 | int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_file | ||
166 | int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey | ||
167 | int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1 | ||
168 | int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file | ||
169 | int SSL_CTX_use_certificate | ||
170 | int SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1 | ||
171 | int SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file | ||
172 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl_ctx.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl_ctx.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..508394e75f --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssl_ctx.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ | |||
1 | This is now a bit dated, quite a few of the SSL_ functions could be | ||
2 | SSL_CTX_ functions. I will update this in the future. 30 Aug 1996 | ||
3 | |||
4 | From eay@orb.mincom.oz.au Mon Dec 11 21:37:08 1995 | ||
5 | Received: by orb.mincom.oz.au id AA00696 | ||
6 | (5.65c/IDA-1.4.4 for eay); Mon, 11 Dec 1995 11:37:08 +1000 | ||
7 | Date: Mon, 11 Dec 1995 11:37:08 +1000 (EST) | ||
8 | From: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au> | ||
9 | X-Sender: eay@orb | ||
10 | To: sameer <sameer@c2.org> | ||
11 | Cc: Eric Young <eay@mincom.oz.au> | ||
12 | Subject: Re: PEM_readX509 oesn't seem to be working | ||
13 | In-Reply-To: <199512110102.RAA12521@infinity.c2.org> | ||
14 | Message-Id: <Pine.SOL.3.91.951211112115.28608D-100000@orb> | ||
15 | Mime-Version: 1.0 | ||
16 | Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; charset=US-ASCII | ||
17 | Status: RO | ||
18 | X-Status: | ||
19 | |||
20 | On Sun, 10 Dec 1995, sameer wrote: | ||
21 | > OK, that's solved. I've found out that it is saying "no | ||
22 | > certificate set" in SSL_accept because s->conn == NULL | ||
23 | > so there is some place I need to initialize s->conn that I am | ||
24 | > not initializing it. | ||
25 | |||
26 | The full order of things for a server should be. | ||
27 | |||
28 | ctx=SSL_CTX_new(); | ||
29 | |||
30 | /* The next line should not really be using ctx->cert but I'll leave it | ||
31 | * this way right now... I don't want a X509_ routine to know about an SSL | ||
32 | * structure, there should be an SSL_load_verify_locations... hmm, I may | ||
33 | * add it tonight. | ||
34 | */ | ||
35 | X509_load_verify_locations(ctx->cert,CAfile,CApath); | ||
36 | |||
37 | /* Ok now for each new connection we do the following */ | ||
38 | con=SSL_new(ctx); | ||
39 | SSL_set_fd(con,s); | ||
40 | SSL_set_verify(con,verify,verify_callback); | ||
41 | |||
42 | /* set the certificate and private key to use. */ | ||
43 | SSL_use_certificate_ASN1(con,X509_certificate); | ||
44 | SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1(con,RSA_private_key); | ||
45 | |||
46 | SSL_accept(con); | ||
47 | |||
48 | SSL_read(con)/SSL_write(con); | ||
49 | |||
50 | There is a bit more than that but that is basically the structure. | ||
51 | |||
52 | Create a context and specify where to lookup certificates. | ||
53 | |||
54 | foreach connection | ||
55 | { | ||
56 | create a SSL structure | ||
57 | set the certificate and private key | ||
58 | do a SSL_accept | ||
59 | |||
60 | we should now be ok | ||
61 | } | ||
62 | |||
63 | eric | ||
64 | -- | ||
65 | Eric Young | Signature removed since it was generating | ||
66 | AARNet: eay@mincom.oz.au | more followups than the message contents :-) | ||
67 | |||
68 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssleay.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssleay.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a0e86aef7c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssleay.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ | |||
1 | SSLeay: a cryptographic kitchen sink. | ||
2 | |||
3 | 1st December 1995 | ||
4 | Way back at the start of April 1995, I was looking for a mindless | ||
5 | programming project. A friend of mine (Tim Hudson) said "why don't you do SSL, | ||
6 | it has DES encryption in it and I would not mind using it in a SSL telnet". | ||
7 | While it was true I had written a DES library in previous years, litle | ||
8 | did I know what an expansive task SSL would turn into. | ||
9 | |||
10 | First of all, the SSL protocol contains DES encryption. Well and good. My | ||
11 | DES library was fast and portable. It also contained the RSA's RC4 stream | ||
12 | cipher. Again, not a problem, some-one had just posted to sci.crypt | ||
13 | something that was claimed to be RC4. It also contained IDEA, I had the | ||
14 | specifications, not a problem to implement. MD5, an RFC, trivial, at most | ||
15 | I could spend a week or so trying to see if I could speed up the | ||
16 | implementation. All in all a nice set of ciphers. | ||
17 | Then the first 'expantion of the scope', RSA public key | ||
18 | encryption. Since I did not knowing a thing about public key encryption | ||
19 | or number theory, this appeared quite a daunting task. Just writing a | ||
20 | big number library would be problomatic in itself, let alone making it fast. | ||
21 | At this point the scope of 'implementing SSL' expands eponentialy. | ||
22 | First of all, the RSA private keys were being kept in ASN.1 format. | ||
23 | Thankfully the RSA PKCS series of documents explains this format. So I now | ||
24 | needed to be able to encode and decode arbitary ASN.1 objects. The Public | ||
25 | keys were embeded in X509 certificates. Hmm... these are not only | ||
26 | ASN.1 objects but they make up a heirachy of authentication. To | ||
27 | authenticate a X509 certificate one needs to retrieve it's issuers | ||
28 | certificate etc etc. Hmm..., so I also need to implement some kind | ||
29 | of certificate management software. I would also have to implement | ||
30 | software to authenticate certificates. At this point the support code made | ||
31 | the SSL part of my library look quite small. | ||
32 | Around this time, the first version of SSLeay was released. | ||
33 | |||
34 | Ah, but here was the problem, I was not happy with the code so far. As may | ||
35 | have become obvious, I had been treating all of this as a learning | ||
36 | exersize, so I have completely written the library myself. As such, due | ||
37 | to the way it had grown like a fungus, much of the library was not | ||
38 | 'elagent' or neat. There were global and static variables all over the | ||
39 | place, the SSL part did not even handle non-blocking IO. | ||
40 | The Great rewrite began. | ||
41 | |||
42 | As of this point in time, the 'Great rewrite' has almost finished. So what | ||
43 | follows is an approximate list of what is actually SSLeay 0.5.0 | ||
44 | |||
45 | /********* This needs to be updated for 0.6.0+ *************/ | ||
46 | |||
47 | --- | ||
48 | The library contains the following routines. Please note that most of these | ||
49 | functions are not specfic for SSL or any other particular cipher | ||
50 | implementation. I have tried to make all the routines as general purpose | ||
51 | as possible. So you should not think of this library as an SSL | ||
52 | implemtation, but rather as a library of cryptographic functions | ||
53 | that also contains SSL. I refer to each of these function groupings as | ||
54 | libraries since they are often capable of functioning as independant | ||
55 | libraries | ||
56 | |||
57 | First up, the general ciphers and message digests supported by the library. | ||
58 | |||
59 | MD2 rfc???, a standard 'by parts' interface to this algorithm. | ||
60 | MD5 rfc???, the same type of interface as for the MD2 library except a | ||
61 | different algorithm. | ||
62 | SHA THe Secure Hash Algorithm. Again the same type of interface as | ||
63 | MD2/MD5 except the digest is 20 bytes. | ||
64 | SHA1 The 'revised' version of SHA. Just about identical to SHA except | ||
65 | for one tweak of an inner loop. | ||
66 | DES This is my libdes library that has been floating around for the last | ||
67 | few years. It has been enhanced for no other reason than completeness. | ||
68 | It now supports ecb, cbc, cfb, ofb, cfb64, ofb64 in normal mode and | ||
69 | triple DES modes of ecb, cbc, cfb64 and ofb64. cfb64 and ofb64 are | ||
70 | functional interfaces to the 64 bit modes of cfb and ofb used in | ||
71 | such a way thay they function as single character interfaces. | ||
72 | RC4 The RSA Inc. stream cipher. | ||
73 | RC2 The RSA Inc. block cipher. | ||
74 | IDEA An implmentation of the IDEA cipher, the library supports ecb, cbc, | ||
75 | cfb64 and ofb64 modes of operation. | ||
76 | |||
77 | Now all the above mentioned ciphers and digests libraries support high | ||
78 | speed, minimal 'crap in the way' type interfaces. For fastest and | ||
79 | lowest level access, these routines should be used directly. | ||
80 | |||
81 | Now there was also the matter of public key crypto systems. These are | ||
82 | based on large integer arithmatic. | ||
83 | |||
84 | BN This is my large integer library. It supports all the normal | ||
85 | arithmentic operations. It uses malloc extensivly and as such has | ||
86 | no limits of the size of the numbers being manipulated. If you | ||
87 | wish to use 4000 bit RSA moduli, these routines will handle it. | ||
88 | This library also contains routines to 'generate' prime numbers and | ||
89 | to test for primality. The RSA and DH libraries sit on top of this | ||
90 | library. As of this point in time, I don't support SHA, but | ||
91 | when I do add it, it will just sit on top of the routines contained | ||
92 | in this library. | ||
93 | RSA This implements the RSA public key algorithm. It also contains | ||
94 | routines that will generate a new private/public key pair. | ||
95 | All the RSA functions conform to the PKCS#1 standard. | ||
96 | DH This is an implementation of the | ||
97 | Diffie-Hellman protocol. There are all the require routines for | ||
98 | the protocol, plus extra routines that can be used to generate a | ||
99 | strong prime for use with a specified generator. While this last | ||
100 | routine is not generally required by applications implementing DH, | ||
101 | It is present for completeness and because I thing it is much | ||
102 | better to be able to 'generate' your own 'magic' numbers as oposed | ||
103 | to using numbers suplied by others. I conform to the PKCS#3 | ||
104 | standard where required. | ||
105 | |||
106 | You may have noticed the preceeding section mentions the 'generation' of | ||
107 | prime numbers. Now this requries the use of 'random numbers'. | ||
108 | |||
109 | RAND This psuedo-random number library is based on MD5 at it's core | ||
110 | and a large internal state (2k bytes). Once you have entered enough | ||
111 | seed data into this random number algorithm I don't feel | ||
112 | you will ever need to worry about it generating predictable output. | ||
113 | Due to the way I am writing a portable library, I have left the | ||
114 | issue of how to get good initial random seed data upto the | ||
115 | application but I do have support routines for saving and loading a | ||
116 | persistant random number state for use between program runs. | ||
117 | |||
118 | Now to make all these ciphers easier to use, a higher level | ||
119 | interface was required. In this form, the same function would be used to | ||
120 | encrypt 'by parts', via any one of the above mentioned ciphers. | ||
121 | |||
122 | EVP The Digital EnVeloPe library is quite large. At it's core are | ||
123 | function to perform encryption and decryption by parts while using | ||
124 | an initial parameter to specify which of the 17 different ciphers | ||
125 | or 4 different message digests to use. On top of these are implmented | ||
126 | the digital signature functions, sign, verify, seal and open. | ||
127 | Base64 encoding of binary data is also done in this library. | ||
128 | |||
129 | PEM rfc???? describe the format for Privacy Enhanced eMail. | ||
130 | As part of this standard, methods of encoding digital enveloped | ||
131 | data is an ascii format are defined. As such, I use a form of these | ||
132 | to encode enveloped data. While at this point in time full support | ||
133 | for PEM has not been built into the library, a minimal subset of | ||
134 | the secret key and Base64 encoding is present. These reoutines are | ||
135 | mostly used to Ascii encode binary data with a 'type' associated | ||
136 | with it and perhaps details of private key encryption used to | ||
137 | encrypt the data. | ||
138 | |||
139 | PKCS7 This is another Digital Envelope encoding standard which uses ASN.1 | ||
140 | to encode the data. At this point in time, while there are some | ||
141 | routines to encode and decode this binary format, full support is | ||
142 | not present. | ||
143 | |||
144 | As Mentioned, above, there are several different ways to encode | ||
145 | data structures. | ||
146 | |||
147 | ASN1 This library is more a set of primatives used to encode the packing | ||
148 | and unpacking of data structures. It is used by the X509 | ||
149 | certificate standard and by the PKCS standards which are used by | ||
150 | this library. It also contains routines for duplicating and signing | ||
151 | the structures asocisated with X509. | ||
152 | |||
153 | X509 The X509 library contains routines for packing and unpacking, | ||
154 | verifying and just about every thing else you would want to do with | ||
155 | X509 certificates. | ||
156 | |||
157 | PKCS7 PKCS-7 is a standard for encoding digital envelope data | ||
158 | structures. At this point in time the routines will load and save | ||
159 | DER forms of these structees. They need to be re-worked to support | ||
160 | the BER form which is the normal way PKCS-7 is encoded. If the | ||
161 | previous 2 sentances don't make much sense, don't worry, this | ||
162 | library is not used by this version of SSLeay anyway. | ||
163 | |||
164 | OBJ ASN.1 uses 'object identifiers' to identify objects. A set of | ||
165 | functions were requred to translate from ASN.1 to an intenger, to a | ||
166 | character string. This library provieds these translations | ||
167 | |||
168 | Now I mentioned an X509 library. X509 specified a hieachy of certificates | ||
169 | which needs to be traversed to authenticate particular certificates. | ||
170 | |||
171 | METH This library is used to push 'methods' of retrieving certificates | ||
172 | into the library. There are some supplied 'methods' with SSLeay | ||
173 | but applications can add new methods if they so desire. | ||
174 | This library has not been finished and is not being used in this | ||
175 | version. | ||
176 | |||
177 | Now all the above are required for use in the initial point of this project. | ||
178 | |||
179 | SSL The SSL protocol. This is a full implmentation of SSL v 2. It | ||
180 | support both server and client authentication. SSL v 3 support | ||
181 | will be added when the SSL v 3 specification is released in it's | ||
182 | final form. | ||
183 | |||
184 | Now quite a few of the above mentioned libraries rely on a few 'complex' | ||
185 | data structures. For each of these I have a library. | ||
186 | |||
187 | Lhash This is a hash table library which is used extensivly. | ||
188 | |||
189 | STACK An implemetation of a Stack data structure. | ||
190 | |||
191 | BUF A simple character array structure that also support a function to | ||
192 | check that the array is greater that a certain size, if it is not, | ||
193 | it is realloced so that is it. | ||
194 | |||
195 | TXT_DB A simple memory based text file data base. The application can specify | ||
196 | unique indexes that will be enforced at update time. | ||
197 | |||
198 | CONF Most of the programs written for this library require a configuration | ||
199 | file. Instead of letting programs constantly re-implment this | ||
200 | subsystem, the CONF library provides a consistant and flexable | ||
201 | interface to not only configuration files but also environment | ||
202 | variables. | ||
203 | |||
204 | But what about when something goes wrong? | ||
205 | The one advantage (and perhaps disadvantage) of all of these | ||
206 | functions being in one library was the ability to implement a | ||
207 | single error reporting system. | ||
208 | |||
209 | ERR This library is used to report errors. The error system records | ||
210 | library number, function number (in the library) and reason | ||
211 | number. Multiple errors can be reported so that an 'error' trace | ||
212 | is created. The errors can be printed in numeric or textual form. | ||
213 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssluse.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssluse.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2e3a26cbf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/ssluse.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ | |||
1 | We have an SSL_CTX which contains global information for lots of | ||
2 | SSL connections. The session-id cache and the certificate verificate cache. | ||
3 | It also contains default values for use when certificates are used. | ||
4 | |||
5 | SSL_CTX | ||
6 | default cipher list | ||
7 | session-id cache | ||
8 | certificate cache | ||
9 | default session-id timeout period | ||
10 | New session-id callback | ||
11 | Required session-id callback | ||
12 | session-id stats | ||
13 | Informational callback | ||
14 | Callback that is set, overrides the SSLeay X509 certificate | ||
15 | verification | ||
16 | The default Certificate/Private Key pair | ||
17 | Default read ahead mode. | ||
18 | Default verify mode and verify callback. These are not used | ||
19 | if the over ride callback mentioned above is used. | ||
20 | |||
21 | Each SSL can have the following defined for it before a connection is made. | ||
22 | |||
23 | Certificate | ||
24 | Private key | ||
25 | Ciphers to use | ||
26 | Certificate verify mode and callback | ||
27 | IO object to use in the comunication. | ||
28 | Some 'read-ahead' mode information. | ||
29 | A previous session-id to re-use. | ||
30 | |||
31 | A connection is made by using SSL_connect or SSL_accept. | ||
32 | When non-blocking IO is being used, there are functions that can be used | ||
33 | to determin where and why the SSL_connect or SSL_accept did not complete. | ||
34 | This information can be used to recall the functions when the 'error' | ||
35 | condition has dissapeared. | ||
36 | |||
37 | After the connection has been made, information can be retrived about the | ||
38 | SSL session and the session-id values that have been decided apon. | ||
39 | The 'peer' certificate can be retrieved. | ||
40 | |||
41 | The session-id values include | ||
42 | 'start time' | ||
43 | 'timeout length' | ||
44 | |||
45 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/stack.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/stack.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c20b1b664 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/stack.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ | |||
1 | The stack data structure is used to store an ordered list of objects. | ||
2 | It is basically misnamed to call it a stack but it can function that way | ||
3 | and that is what I originally used it for. Due to the way element | ||
4 | pointers are kept in a malloc()ed array, the most efficient way to use this | ||
5 | structure is to add and delete elements from the end via sk_pop() and | ||
6 | sk_push(). If you wish to do 'lookups' sk_find() is quite efficient since | ||
7 | it will sort the stack (if required) and then do a binary search to lookup | ||
8 | the requested item. This sorting occurs automatically so just sk_push() | ||
9 | elements on the stack and don't worry about the order. Do remember that if | ||
10 | you do a sk_find(), the order of the elements will change. | ||
11 | |||
12 | You should never need to 'touch' this structure directly. | ||
13 | typedef struct stack_st | ||
14 | { | ||
15 | unsigned int num; | ||
16 | char **data; | ||
17 | int sorted; | ||
18 | |||
19 | unsigned int num_alloc; | ||
20 | int (*comp)(); | ||
21 | } STACK; | ||
22 | |||
23 | 'num' holds the number of elements in the stack, 'data' is the array of | ||
24 | elements. 'sorted' is 1 is the list has been sorted, 0 if not. | ||
25 | |||
26 | num_alloc is the number of 'nodes' allocated in 'data'. When num becomes | ||
27 | larger than num_alloc, data is realloced to a larger size. | ||
28 | If 'comp' is set, it is a function that is used to compare 2 of the items | ||
29 | in the stack. The function should return -1, 0 or 1, depending on the | ||
30 | ordering. | ||
31 | |||
32 | #define sk_num(sk) ((sk)->num) | ||
33 | #define sk_value(sk,n) ((sk)->data[n]) | ||
34 | |||
35 | These 2 macros should be used to access the number of elements in the | ||
36 | 'stack' and to access a pointer to one of the values. | ||
37 | |||
38 | STACK *sk_new(int (*c)()); | ||
39 | This creates a new stack. If 'c', the comparison function, is not | ||
40 | specified, the various functions that operate on a sorted 'stack' will not | ||
41 | work (sk_find()). NULL is returned on failure. | ||
42 | |||
43 | void sk_free(STACK *); | ||
44 | This function free()'s a stack structure. The elements in the | ||
45 | stack will not be freed so one should 'pop' and free all elements from the | ||
46 | stack before calling this function or call sk_pop_free() instead. | ||
47 | |||
48 | void sk_pop_free(STACK *st; void (*func)()); | ||
49 | This function calls 'func' for each element on the stack, passing | ||
50 | the element as the argument. sk_free() is then called to free the 'stack' | ||
51 | structure. | ||
52 | |||
53 | int sk_insert(STACK *sk,char *data,int where); | ||
54 | This function inserts 'data' into stack 'sk' at location 'where'. | ||
55 | If 'where' is larger that the number of elements in the stack, the element | ||
56 | is put at the end. This function tends to be used by other 'stack' | ||
57 | functions. Returns 0 on failure, otherwise the number of elements in the | ||
58 | new stack. | ||
59 | |||
60 | char *sk_delete(STACK *st,int loc); | ||
61 | Remove the item a location 'loc' from the stack and returns it. | ||
62 | Returns NULL if the 'loc' is out of range. | ||
63 | |||
64 | char *sk_delete_ptr(STACK *st, char *p); | ||
65 | If the data item pointed to by 'p' is in the stack, it is deleted | ||
66 | from the stack and returned. NULL is returned if the element is not in the | ||
67 | stack. | ||
68 | |||
69 | int sk_find(STACK *st,char *data); | ||
70 | Returns the location that contains a value that is equal to | ||
71 | the 'data' item. If the comparison function was not set, this function | ||
72 | does a linear search. This function actually qsort()s the stack if it is not | ||
73 | in order and then uses bsearch() to do the initial search. If the | ||
74 | search fails,, -1 is returned. For mutliple items with the same | ||
75 | value, the index of the first in the array is returned. | ||
76 | |||
77 | int sk_push(STACK *st,char *data); | ||
78 | Append 'data' to the stack. 0 is returned if there is a failure | ||
79 | (due to a malloc failure), else 1. This is | ||
80 | sk_insert(st,data,sk_num(st)); | ||
81 | |||
82 | int sk_unshift(STACK *st,char *data); | ||
83 | Prepend 'data' to the front (location 0) of the stack. This is | ||
84 | sk_insert(st,data,0); | ||
85 | |||
86 | char *sk_shift(STACK *st); | ||
87 | Return and delete from the stack the first element in the stack. | ||
88 | This is sk_delete(st,0); | ||
89 | |||
90 | char *sk_pop(STACK *st); | ||
91 | Return and delete the last element on the stack. This is | ||
92 | sk_delete(st,sk_num(sk)-1); | ||
93 | |||
94 | void sk_zero(STACK *st); | ||
95 | Removes all items from the stack. It does not 'free' | ||
96 | pointers but is a quick way to clear a 'stack of references'. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/threads.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/threads.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..251061e896 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/threads.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ | |||
1 | How to compile SSLeay for multi-threading. | ||
2 | |||
3 | Well basically it is quite simple, set the compiler flags and build. | ||
4 | I have only really done much testing under Solaris and Windows NT. | ||
5 | If you library supports localtime_r() and gmtime_r() add, | ||
6 | -DTHREADS to the makefile parameters. You can probably survive with out | ||
7 | this define unless you are going to have multiple threads generating | ||
8 | certificates at once. It will not affect the SSL side of things. | ||
9 | |||
10 | The approach I have taken to doing locking is to make the application provide | ||
11 | callbacks to perform locking and so that the SSLeay library can distinguish | ||
12 | between threads (for the error state). | ||
13 | |||
14 | To have a look at an example program, 'cd mt; vi mttest.c'. | ||
15 | To build under solaris, sh solaris.sh, for Windows NT or Windows 95, | ||
16 | win32.bat | ||
17 | |||
18 | This will build mttest which will fire up 10 threads that talk SSL | ||
19 | to each other 10 times. | ||
20 | To enable everything to work, the application needs to call | ||
21 | |||
22 | CRYPTO_set_id_callback(id_function); | ||
23 | CRYPTO_set_locking_callback(locking_function); | ||
24 | |||
25 | before any multithreading is started. | ||
26 | id_function does not need to be defined under Windows NT or 95, the | ||
27 | correct function will be called if it is not. Under unix, getpid() | ||
28 | is call if the id_callback is not defined, for solaris this is wrong | ||
29 | (since threads id's are not pid's) but under IRIX it is correct | ||
30 | (threads are just processes sharing the data segement). | ||
31 | |||
32 | The locking_callback is used to perform locking by the SSLeay library. | ||
33 | eg. | ||
34 | |||
35 | void solaris_locking_callback(mode,type,file,line) | ||
36 | int mode; | ||
37 | int type; | ||
38 | char *file; | ||
39 | int line; | ||
40 | { | ||
41 | if (mode & CRYPTO_LOCK) | ||
42 | mutex_lock(&(lock_cs[type])); | ||
43 | else | ||
44 | mutex_unlock(&(lock_cs[type])); | ||
45 | } | ||
46 | |||
47 | Now in this case I have used mutexes instead of read/write locks, since they | ||
48 | are faster and there are not many read locks in SSLeay, you may as well | ||
49 | always use write locks. file and line are __FILE__ and __LINE__ from | ||
50 | the compile and can be usefull when debugging. | ||
51 | |||
52 | Now as you can see, 'type' can be one of a range of values, these values are | ||
53 | defined in crypto/crypto.h | ||
54 | CRYPTO_get_lock_name(type) will return a text version of what the lock is. | ||
55 | There are CRYPTO_NUM_LOCKS locks required, so under solaris, the setup | ||
56 | for multi-threading can be | ||
57 | |||
58 | static mutex_t lock_cs[CRYPTO_NUM_LOCKS]; | ||
59 | |||
60 | void thread_setup() | ||
61 | { | ||
62 | int i; | ||
63 | |||
64 | for (i=0; i<CRYPTO_NUM_LOCKS; i++) | ||
65 | mutex_init(&(lock_cs[i]),USYNC_THREAD,NULL); | ||
66 | CRYPTO_set_id_callback((unsigned long (*)())solaris_thread_id); | ||
67 | CRYPTO_set_locking_callback((void (*)())solaris_locking_callback); | ||
68 | } | ||
69 | |||
70 | As a final note, under Windows NT or Windows 95, you have to be careful | ||
71 | not to mix the various threaded, unthreaded and debug libraries. | ||
72 | Normally if they are mixed incorrectly, mttest will crash just after printing | ||
73 | out some usage statistics at the end. This is because the | ||
74 | different system libraries use different malloc routines and if | ||
75 | data is malloc()ed inside crypt32.dll or ssl32.dll and then free()ed by a | ||
76 | different library malloc, things get very confused. | ||
77 | |||
78 | The default SSLeay DLL builds use /MD, so if you use this on your | ||
79 | application, things will work as expected. If you use /MDd, | ||
80 | you will probably have to rebuild SSLeay using this flag. | ||
81 | I should modify util/mk1mf.pl so it does all this correctly, but | ||
82 | this has not been done yet. | ||
83 | |||
84 | One last warning. Because locking overheads are actually quite large, the | ||
85 | statistics collected against the SSL_CTX for successfull connections etc | ||
86 | are not locked when updated. This does make it possible for these | ||
87 | values to be slightly lower than they should be, if you are | ||
88 | running multithreaded on a multi-processor box, but this does not really | ||
89 | matter much. | ||
90 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/txt_db.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/txt_db.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3a5b0d50a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/txt_db.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ | |||
1 | TXT_DB, a simple text based in memory database. | ||
2 | |||
3 | It holds rows of ascii data, for which the only special character is '\0'. | ||
4 | The rows can be of an unlimited length. | ||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/verify b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/verify new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b78d96159d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/verify | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ | |||
1 | X509_verify_cert_chain( | ||
2 | CERT_STORE *cert_store, | ||
3 | STACK /* X509 */ *certs, | ||
4 | int *verify_result, | ||
5 | int (*verify_error_callback)() | ||
6 | char *argument_to_callback, /* SSL */ | ||
7 | |||
8 | app_verify_callback( | ||
9 | char *app_verify_arg, /* from SSL_CTX */ | ||
10 | STACK /* X509 */ *certs, | ||
11 | int *verify_result, | ||
12 | int (*verify_error_callback)() | ||
13 | SSL *s, | ||
14 | |||
15 | int X509_verify_cert( | ||
16 | CERT_STORE *cert_store, | ||
17 | X509 *x509, | ||
18 | int *verify_result, | ||
19 | int (*verify_error_callback)(), | ||
20 | char *arg, | ||
21 | |||
22 | |||
diff --git a/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/why.doc b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/why.doc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a1ac84bd27 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/lib/libssl/src/doc/why.doc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ | |||
1 | This file is more of a note for other people who wish to understand why | ||
2 | the build environment is the way it is :-). | ||
3 | |||
4 | The include files 'depend' as follows. | ||
5 | Each of | ||
6 | crypto/*/*.c includes crypto/cryptlib.h | ||
7 | ssl/*.c include ssl/ssl_locl.h | ||
8 | apps/*.c include apps/apps.h | ||
9 | crypto/cryptlib.h, ssl/ssl_locl.h and apps/apps.h | ||
10 | all include e_os.h which contains OS/environment specific information. | ||
11 | If you need to add something todo with a particular environment, | ||
12 | add it to this file. It is worth remembering that quite a few libraries, | ||
13 | like lhash, des, md, sha etc etc do not include crypto/cryptlib.h. This | ||
14 | is because these libraries should be 'independantly compilable' and so I | ||
15 | try to keep them this way. | ||
16 | e_os.h is not so much a part of SSLeay, as the placing in one spot all the | ||
17 | evil OS dependant muck. | ||
18 | |||
19 | I wanted to automate as many things as possible. This includes | ||
20 | error number generation. A | ||
21 | make errors | ||
22 | will scan the source files for error codes, append them to the correct | ||
23 | header files, and generate the functions to print the text version | ||
24 | of the error numbers. So don't even think about adding error numbers by | ||
25 | hand, put them in the form | ||
26 | XXXerr(XXXX_F_XXXX,YYYY_R_YYYY); | ||
27 | on line and it will be automatically picked up my a make errors. | ||
28 | |||
29 | In a similar vein, programs to be added into ssleay in the apps directory | ||
30 | just need to have an entry added to E_EXE in makefile.ssl and | ||
31 | everthing will work as expected. Don't edit progs.h by hand. | ||
32 | |||
33 | make links re-generates the symbolic links that are used. The reason why | ||
34 | I keep everything in its own directory, and don't put all the | ||
35 | test programs and header files in 'test' and 'include' is because I want | ||
36 | to keep the 'sub-libraries' independant. I still 'pull' out | ||
37 | indervidual libraries for use in specific projects where the code is | ||
38 | required. I have used the 'lhash' library in just about every software | ||
39 | project I have worked on :-). | ||
40 | |||
41 | make depend generates dependancies and | ||
42 | make dclean removes them. | ||
43 | |||
44 | You will notice that I use perl quite a bit when I could be using 'sed'. | ||
45 | The reason I decided to do this was to just stick to one 'extra' program. | ||
46 | For Windows NT, I have perl and no sed. | ||
47 | |||
48 | The util/mk1mf.pl program can be used to generate a single makefile. | ||
49 | I use this because makefiles under Microsoft are horrific. | ||
50 | Each C compiler seems to have different linker formats, which have | ||
51 | to be used because the retarted C compilers explode when you do | ||
52 | cl -o file *.o. | ||
53 | |||
54 | Now some would argue that I should just use the single makefile. I don't | ||
55 | like it during develoment for 2 reasons. First, the actuall make | ||
56 | command takes a long time. For my current setup, if I'm in | ||
57 | crypto/bn and I type make, only the crypto/bn directory gets rebuilt, | ||
58 | which is nice when you are modifying prototypes in bn.h which | ||
59 | half the SSLeay depends on. The second is that to add a new souce file | ||
60 | I just plonk it in at the required spot in the local makefile. This | ||
61 | then alows me to keep things local, I don't need to modify a 'global' | ||
62 | tables (the make for unix, the make for NT, the make for w31...). | ||
63 | When I am ripping apart a library structure, it is nice to only | ||
64 | have to worry about one directory :-). | ||
65 | |||
66 | Having said all this, for the hell of it I put together 2 files that | ||
67 | #include all the souce code (generated by doing a ls */*.o after a build). | ||
68 | crypto.c takes only 30 seconds to build under NT and 2 minutes under linux | ||
69 | for my pentium100. Much faster that the normal build :-). | ||
70 | Again, the problem is that when using libraries, every program linked | ||
71 | to libcrypto.a would suddenly get 330k of library when it may only need | ||
72 | 1k. This technique does look like a nice way to do shared libraries though. | ||
73 | |||
74 | Oh yes, as a final note, to 'build' a distribution, I just type | ||
75 | make dist. | ||
76 | This cleans and packages everything. The directory needs to be called | ||
77 | SSLeay since the make does a 'cd ..' and renames and tars things up. | ||
78 | |||
79 | |||